Proxim Wireless MB82HP49 Tsunami 8000 Point-to-Point and Point-to-multipoint Product User Manual

Proxim Wireless Corporation Tsunami 8000 Point-to-Point and Point-to-multipoint Product

User Manual

  Tsunami® 8100 Series  (Point-to-point and Point-to-multipoint Products)     Software Management Guide      Products Covered  Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU / MP-8100-WD-HP -  Tsunami® MP-8100-SUA / MP-8100-WD-HP -  Tsunami® MP-8150-SUR / MP-815-WD-HP -  Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE  Tsunami® MP-8160-BSU  -  Tsunami® MP-8160-SUA  -  Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE  Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA  Tsunami® QB-8100-LNK  Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR  Tsunami® QB-8150-LNK  Tsunami® QB-8150-LNK-12/50
     Copyright  © 2011 Proxim Wireless Corporation, Milpitas, CA. All rights reserved. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 5,231,634; 5,875,179; 6,006,090; 5,809,060; 6,075,812; 5,077,753. The content described herein are copyrighted with all rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Proxim Wireless Corporation.   Trademarks  Tsunami®, Proxim, and the Proxim logo are the trademarks of Proxim Wireless Corporation. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.   Disclaimer  Proxim reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in content from time-to-time without obligation on the part of Proxim to provide notification of such revision or change. Proxim may make improvements or changes in the product(s) described in this manual at any time. When using this device, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons.   GPL License Note  Tsunami® products include software code developed by third parties, including software code subject to the GNU General Public License ("GPL") or GNU Lesser General Public License ("LGPL"). Please see the GPL and LGPL Web sites to view the terms of each license.   To access the GPL Code and LGPL Code used, visit the Proxim Web site (http://support.proxim.com) to get a copy of the source. The GPL Code and LGPL Code used in this device are distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY and are subject to the copyrights of one or more authors.   For details, see the GPL Code and LGPL Code of this device and the terms of the GPL and LGPL.                         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide   Documentation Version: 4.0  P/N 765-00131, November 2011      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  2
   Contents   Preface. . .  8 1  Overview . . . ........................................................................................................................................ 10 About Tsunami® 8100 Products  . 10 Wireless Network Topology  . 11 Point-to-Multipoint (PTMP). . .  11 Point-to-Point Link . . .  14 Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output (MIMO) . . .  . 17 Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol (WORP) . . .  . 17 2 Management and Monitoring Capabilities . . . .................................................................................... 19 Web (HTTP/HTTPS) Interface . . .  . 19 Command Line Interface  . . .  . 19 HyperTerminal . . .  19 Telnet. . .  20 Secure Shell (SSH) . . .  20 SNMP Management . . .  . 20 ProximVision ES . . .  . 20 3  Device Initialization . . .  21 Initialization . . .  . 21 ScanTool . . .  21 Initialize Device using ScanTool. . .  22 Modifying the IP Address of the Device using ScanTool . . .  23 Logging onto the Web Interface  . 23 Home Page . . .  25 COMMIT . . .  26 REBOOT. . .  27 Factory Default Configuration  . 27 4  Basic Configuration . . . ....................................................................................................................... 29 5  Advanced Configuration . . .  34 System . . .  . 34 Network  . 35 IP Configuration (Bridge Mode) . . .  36 IP Configuration (Routing Mode) . . .  38 IP Configuration (Routing Mode with PPPoE Client Enabled)  40 Ethernet  . 42 Basic Ethernet Configuration . . .  42 Advanced Configuration . . .  43 Wireless . . .  . 44   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  3
       Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol (WORP). . .  44 Wireless Interface Properties . . .  49 MIMO Properties . . .  57 Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) . . .  59 DDRS. . .  64 Security . . .  . 68 Wireless Security . . .  68 RADIUS . . .  71 MAC ACL . . .  73 Quality of Service (QoS) . . .  . 74 QoS Concepts and Definitions . . .  74 QoS Configuration . . .  79 QoS Configuration for a Management Station . . .  96 RADIUS Based SU QoS Configuration  . 100 VLAN (Bridge Mode Only)  . . .  . 101 System-Level VLAN Configuration . . .  101 Ethernet VLAN Configuration . . .  102 RADIUS Based SU VLAN Configuration  . 107 Filtering (Bridge Only)  . 109 Protocol Filter . . .  110 Static MAC Address Filter . . .  113 Advanced Filtering. . .  116 TCP/UDP Port Filter . . .  118 Storm Threshold Filter . . .  120 WORP Intra Cell Blocking. . .  121 DHCP   . . .  . 125 DHCP Pool. . .  125 DHCP Server . . .  126 DHCP Relay (Routing Mode only). . .  127 IGMP Snooping . . .  . 128 Routing Mode Features . . .  . 130 Static Route Table . . .  130 Network Address Translation (NAT) . . .  132 RIP. . .  135 PPPoE End Point (SU Only) . . .  136 IP over IP Tunneling . . .  142 6  Management. . . ...................................................................................................................................... 147 System  . 147 System Information . . .  147 Inventory Management . . .  148 Licensed Features . . .  149  Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  4
       File Management . . .  . 150 TFTP Server . . .  150 Text Based Configuration (TBC) File Management . . .  151 Upgrade Firmware. . .  153 Upgrade Configuration . . .  154 Retrieve From Device . . .  156 Services . . .  . 159 HTTP/HTTPS. . .  159 Telnet/SSH . . .  160 SNMP . . .  162 Logs . . .  165 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)  . 167 Access Control  . 169 Reset to Factory . . .  . 170 Convert QB to MP . . .  . 171 7  Monitor . . .  173 Interface Statistics  . 173 Ethernet Statistics . . .  173 Wireless Statistics  175 PPPoE Statistics . . .  176 IP Tunnels . . .  177 WORP Statistics . . .  . 179 General Statistics. . .  179 SU / End Point B Link Statistics. . .  181 BSU/End Point A Link Statistics. . .  184 QoS Statistics (BSU or End Point A Only) . . .  185 Active VLAN  . 186 Bridge . . .  . 187 Bridge Statistics . . .  187 Learn Table . . .  188 Network Layer . . .  . 189 Routing Table . . .  189 IP ARP . . .  189 ICMP Statistics. . .  190 RIP Database . . .  191 RADIUS (BSU or End Point A only)  . . .  . 192 Authentication Statistics . . .  192 IGMP . . .  . 193 Ethernet or Wireless Multicast List . . .  193 Router Port List . . .  194   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  5
       DHCP   . . .  . 194 Logs  . 195 Event Log . . .  195 Syslog . . .  196 Debug Log . . .  196 Temperature Log . . .  197 Tools  . 198 Wireless Site Survey. . .  198 Scan Tool. . .  199 sFlow® . . .  199 Console Commands . . .  204 SNMP v3 Statistics . . .  . 204 8  Troubleshooting . . .  205 PoE Injector . . .  . 206 Connectivity Issues  . 206 Surge or Lightning Issues (For Connectorized devices)  . 207 Setup and Configuration Issues . . .  . 208 Application Specific Troubleshooting  . 209 Wireless Link Issues  . 210 Wired (Ethernet) Interface Validation . . .  . 211 Wireless Interface Validation  . 212 Recovery Procedures  . 213 Soft Reset to Factory Defaults . . .  213 Hard Reset to Factory Defaults. . .  213 Forced Reload . . .  214 Setting IP Address using Serial Port . . .  216 Spectrum Analyzer  . 217 Avoiding Interference . . .  218 Conclusion . . .  218 Miscellaneous  . 218 Unable to Retrieve Event Logs through HTTPS . . .  218 A  Feature Applicability . . .  219 B  Parameters Requiring Reboot . . . .................................................................................................... 220 C  Frequency Domains and Channels . . .  223 D SNR Information. . .  231 E  Bootloader CLI and ScanTool. . .  235     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  6
      F  Lightning Protection . . . .......................................................................................... 237 G  Abbreviations . . .  238 H  Statement of Warranty . . . ..................................................................................... 242 I  Technical Services and Support. . . ....................................................................... 244                                                                         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  7
    Preface   Preface    This chapter contains information on the following:  •  About this Guide •  Products Covered •  Audience •  Prerequisites •  Related Documents •  Documentation Conventions About this Guide  This manual gives a jump-start working knowledge on the Tsunami® 8100 products. It explains the step-by-step procedure to configure, manage and monitor these products by using Web Interface.  Products Covered  Tabulated below are the Tsunami® products that are covered in this guide along with the latest software version supported.   Product(s)  Software Version Supported Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU  2.4.0 Tsunami® MP-8100-SUA  2.4.0 Tsunami® MP-8150-SUR  2.4.0 Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE  2.4.0 Tsunami® MP-8160-BSU  2.4.0 Tsunami® MP-8160-SUA  2.4.0 Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE  2.4.0 Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA  2.4.0 Tsunami® QB-8100-LNK  2.4.0 Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR  2.4.0 Tsunami® QB-8150-LNK  2.4.0 Tsunami® QB-8150-LNK-12/50  2.4.0  Audience  The intended audience for this guide is the Network Administrator who installs and/or manages the device.  Prerequisites  The reader of this document should have working knowledge of Wireless Networks, Local Area Networking (LAN) concepts, Network Access Infrastructures and Client-Server Applications.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  8
    Preface   Related Documents  In addition to this guide, you can refer to the following documents that are available on the Proxim’s support site http://support.proxim.com.  •  Quick Installation Guide (QIG) - A quick reference guide that provides essential information to install and configure the device. •  Hardware Installation Guide - A guide that provides an overview about the Tsunami® products, their installation methods and hardware specifications. •  Reference Guide - A guide that provides instructions on how to configure, manage and monitor the device by using Command Line Interface. •  Antenna Guides - A guide that gives insight on the recommended antennas and the ways to align them. •  Safety and Regulatory Compliance Guide - A guide that provides country specific safety and regulatory norms to be followed while installing the devices. Documentation Conventions  Screenshots  This guide uses screenshots to explain the method to configure and manage the device using Web Interface. Based on your device, the screenshots may vary. Hence, we request you to refer to the screenshots that are valid for your device.  Icon Representation   Name Image  Meaning Note  A special instruction that draws attention of a user.    Important  A note of significant importance that a user should be aware of.   Caution  A warning that cautions a user of the possible danger.    Device Naming Conventions  Naming Convention  Description BSU  Refers to a Base Station Unit Subscriber / SU Mode / SU  Refers to both SU and CPE End Point A mode  Refers to a device in End Point A mode End Point B mode  Refers to a device in End Point B mode  : A feature specific to a device is referred to by its name else by the common naming convention as tabulated above.          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  9
1      Overview   This chapter contains information on the following: •   About Tsunami® 8100 Products •   Wireless Network Topology - Point-to-Multipoint (PTMP) - Point-to-Point Link •   Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output (MIMO) •   Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol (WORP)  1.1 About Tsunami® 8100 Products  Proxim’s Tsunami® 8100 product series, consists of point-to-point and point-to-multipoint devices that are designed to provide wireless networking solutions to enterprises and business markets.  This product series consists of the following products:   Product Description  Image Tsunami®  The Tsunami® MP-8100 Base Station unit, is a flexible wireless MP-8100-BSU  outdoor product that operates in 2.3 - 2.5 and 4.9 - 6.0 GHz     frequency bands. This connectorized device comes with a 3x3 MIMO radio and three N-Type connectors to connect external antennas. Tsunami®  The Tsunami® MP-8100 Subscriber unit, is a  flexible  wireless MP-8100-SUA  outdoor product that operates in 2.3 - 2.5 and 4.9 - 6.0 GHz                     frequency bands. This connectorized device comes with a 3x3 MIMO radio and three N-Type connectors to connect external antennas. Tsunami®  The Tsunami® MP-8150 Subscriber unit comes with a 3x3 MIMO MP-8150-SUR  radio operating in 4.9 - 6.0 GHz frequency band.                     This connectorized device comes with a 3x3 MIMO Radio and                        three N-Type connectors to connect external antennas. Tsunami®  The Tsunami® MP-8150 Customer Premises Equipment comes with MP-8150-CPE  a high power 2x2 MIMO radio and 16 dBi integrated dual-polarized panel antenna operating in 5.3 - 6.1 GHz frequency band.   Tsunami®  The Tsunami® MP-8160 Base Station unit, is a flexible outdoor MP-8160-BSU  product that operates in  5.9 - 6.4 GHz frequency band. This connectorized device comes with a high power 2x2 MIMO radio and two N-Type connectors to connect external antennas. Tsunami®  The Tsunami® MP-8160 Subscriber unit, is a flexible outdoor MP-8160-SUA  product that operates in  5.9 - 6.4 GHz frequency band. This connectorized device comes with a high power 2x2 MIMO radio and two N-Type connectors to connect external antennas.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  10
    Overview    Tsunami®  The Tsunami® MP-8160 Customer Premises Equipment comes with MP-8160-CPE  a single high power  2x2 MIMO radio and 15 dBi integrated dual-polarized panel antenna operating in 5.9 - 6.4 GHz frequency band. Tsunami®  The Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA QuickBridge operates in 2.3 - 2.5 and QB-8100-EPA  4.9 - 6.0 GHz frequency bands. This connectorized device comes with a 3x3 MIMO radio and three N-Type connectors to connect external antennas. Tsunami®  A pair of Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA devices form a link. QB-8100-LNK     Tsunami®  The Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR QuickBridge comes with a 2x2 MIMO QB-8150-EPR  radio and 23 dBi integrated dual-polarized panel antenna operating in 4.9 - 6.0 GHz Band.   Tsunami®  A pair of Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR devices form a link. QB-8150-LNK    Tsunami®  A pair of Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-12 devices form a link. QB-8150-LNK-12  The Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-12 device comes with a high power  2x2  MIMO  radio, 12  Mbps  speed  and 16  dBi  integrated  dual-polarized panel antenna operating in 5.3 - 6.1 GHz frequency  band.  Tsunami®  A pair of Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-50 devices form a link. QB-8150-LNK-50  The Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-50 device comes with a high power 2x2 MIMO radio, 50 Mbps and 16 dBi integrated dual-polarized panel antenna operating in 5.3 - 6.1 GHz frequency band.   1.2 Wireless Network Topology  1.2.1 Point-to-Multipoint (PTMP)  Point-to-multipoint is a wireless network that has a central communication device such as a Base Station Unit (BSU), providing connectivity to multiple devices such as Subscribers (SUs) or clients. Any transmission of data that originates from the BSU is received by all SUs; whereas, the data originating from any of the SU is received only by the BSU. This allows numerous sites in a wide area to share resources, including a single high-speed connection to the Internet.               Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  11
    Overview    Listed below are the applications, where Proxim’s Point-to-multipoint devices can be used:  •  Last Mile Access: Competitive broadband service access alternative to Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) or cable for residences and T1 or Ethernet for businesses.                        •  Security and Surveillance: High definition IP-surveillance cameras for monitoring city streets, airports, bridges, seaports, transportation hubs, offices and warehouses.                                         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  12
    Overview    •   Metropolitan Area Network: Secure and reliable connectivity between city buildings.                          •  Enterprise Campus Connectivity: Extend the main network to remote offices, warehouses or other buildings without leased lines.                                            Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  13
    Overview   •   Offshore Communications: Establishes connectivity between seashore and the ships that are nearing the port    locations, or connectivity between off-shore oil rigs and sea shore and so on.                  •  Wireless Intelligent Transportation System (ITS): Increases the traffic efficiency and reduces the commuting time in cities and metropolitan areas.                   1.2.2 Point-to-Point Link A point-to-point link is a dedicated wireless link that connects only two stations. With a point-to-point link, you can set up a connection between two locations as an alternative to: •  Leased lines in building-to-building connections •  Wired Ethernet backbones between wireless access points in difficult-to-wire environments. It is easy to set up a wireless point-to-point link as shown in the following figure. Each device is set up as either an End Point A or an End Point B.        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  14
    Overview                    Figure 1-1 Point-to-Point-Link  Listed below are the applications, where Proxim’s Point-to-Point devices can be used:  •  Backhaul to a Central POP: Avoids expensive installation and recurring charge of a second wireline backhaul to a remote virtual POP.                                                    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  15
    Overview    •   Repeater: Extends distance or overcomes path blockage by adding point-to-point hops                        •   High-bandwidth Last Mile Access: Delivers Transparent LAN Services (TLS) to corporate parks.    •  High Availability and Link Aggregation: Achieves high availability and link aggregation in wireless medium by using two parallel links and additional Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) capable switches. This is applicable only for QB-8100-EPA/LNK and QB-8150-EPR/LNK devices.                                        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  16
    Overview    •  Leased Line Redundancy: Eliminates recurring DS-3 leased line charges with one time installation charge of a QuickBridge link. •  Inter-POP Redundancy: Avoids downtimes caused by a wireline backhaul failure by adding a QuickBridge link as an inter-POP redundancy.  1.3 Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output (MIMO)  Proxim’s  81xx Point-to-point and Point-to-multipoint devices support Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output  (MIMO) antenna  technology that uses multiple antennas at both the transmitter and receiver to improve communication performance. The  underlying technology of Proxim’s product radio(s) are based on a combination of MIMO and OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency  Division Multiplexing). MIMO-OFDM combination radios solve interference, fading and multipath problems On the receiver  side, having multiple receivers increases the amount of received power and also reduces multipath problems by combining  the received signals for each frequency component separately. Hence, MIMO significantly improves the overall gain.  MIMO also uses Spatial multiplexing transmission technique to transmit independent and separately encoded data signals from each of the multiple transmit antennas while reusing or multiplexing in the space dimension. These independent data signals are called Spatial streams. The transmitting antenna uses multiple radio Tx chains and signal paths to simultaneously transmit different data streams, whereas the receiver combines the Rx signals resulting in higher throughput.  By increasing the number of receiving and transmitting antennas, the throughput of the channel increases linearly resulting in high spectral efficiency.   1.4 Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol (WORP)  WORP is a protocol, designed by Proxim to optimize the performance of multi-play outdoor wireless Point-to-Point (PtP) and  Point-to-Multipoint (PTMP)   links   using   packet   radio   technology,   including   the   use   of   cutting   edge  Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output (MIMO) technology.  WORP overcomes the performance degradation, which standards-based wireless technologies are susceptible to when used for outdoor long-range connectivity.  Benefits:  •   More Net Bandwidth: WORP increases the overall net bandwidth of the multipoint system. The net bandwidth using    WORP is higher than any other protocol solution used in an outdoor environment. WORP is a more efficient protocol    that protects the system from packet collisions and transmits the data in an optimal way, which increases the overall   performance.  •   More Concurrent Subscribers: An outdoor point-to-multipoint solution based on 802.11 may connect from 5 to 10    remote nodes, but sometimes performance starts to suffer from collisions with as little as only 2 remote nodes. A    solution using WORP, on the other hand, can connect up to 100 remote nodes without adverse effects on usable    bandwidth, allowing more concurrent Subscriber Units (SU) to be active in a wireless multipoint environment.  •   Smart Scheduling: WORP uses smart scheduling for remote node polling to avoid wasting bandwidth on nodes that    have no traffic to be sent. The Base Station Unit (BSU) dynamically decides how frequently a remote node should be   polled based on the current traffic to and from each remote node and the priority settings for that traffic. The   scheduling is adapted dynamically to the actual traffic and further optimized by following the bandwidth limits as    configured for each remote node.  •   Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS): DDRS enables WORP to dynamically adjust the data rate at which the    wireless traffic is sent. This feature is especially important in point-to-multipoint networks, when different SUs can    sustain different data rates because of the different distances from the BSU. With DDRS, WORP dynamically optimizes    the wireless data rate to each of the SUs independently, keeping the overall net throughput at the highest possible    level. This feature optimizes throughput even for links with different RF conditions on the BSU and SU, by optimizing   downlink        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  17
    Overview   •   Quality of Service: WORP ensures that the most important data arrives with priority by differentiating between    priorities of traffic as defined in the profiles for QoS (Quality of Service), similar to the 802.16 WiMAX QoS standard   definition.  •   Bandwidth Control: WORP allows service providers to control network bandwidth, protecting the network from    excessive bandwidth use by any one station. Additionally, it allows service providers to differentiate their service   offerings.  •  Asymmetric Bandwidth Controls: Asymmetric bandwidth gives network managers the ability to set different   maximum bandwidth rates for a variety of customer groups. This allows service providers to further differentiate their    service offerings and maximize revenues.                                                                      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  18
2      Management and Monitoring Capabilities   A Network administrator can use the following interfaces to configure, manage and monitor the devices. •   Web Interface •   Command Line Interface •   Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) •  ProximVision ES (PVES)  2.1 Web (HTTP/HTTPS) Interface  The Web interface (HTTP) provides easy access to configuration settings and network statistics from any computer on the network. You can access the Web interface, through LAN (switch, hub and so on), the Internet, or with an Ethernet cable connected directly to your computer’s Ethernet port.  HTTPS interface provides an HTTP connection over a Secure Socket Layer (SSL). HTTPS allows the user to access the device in a secure fashion using SSL over port 443. The device supports SSLv3 with a 128-bit encryption certificate maintained by the device for secure communication between the device and the HTTP client. All communications are encrypted using the server and the client-side certificate.   2.2 Command Line Interface  The Command Line Interface (CLI) is a text-based configuration utility that supports a set of keyboard commands and parameters to configure, manage and monitor the device. You can enter the command statements composed of CLI commands and their associated parameters. Commands can be issued from the keyboard for real-time control, or from scripts that automate configuration. For example, when downloading a file, an administrator enters the download CLI Command along with the IP Address, file name, and file type parameters.  2.2.1 HyperTerminal  You can access the CLI over a HyperTerminal serial connection. HyperTerminal is a program that connects to other  Computers, Telnet Sites, Bulletin Board Systems (BBS), Online Services, and Host Computers, by using either modem or a null  modem cable.  If you are using RS-232 cable, verify the following information in the HyperTerminal serial port setup:   Port  COM1 (default) Baud Rate  115200 Data  8-bit Parity  None Stop  1-bit Flow Content  None  : If you are using Windows 7 then use Terminal Emulator program like Teraterm Pro for serial connection.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  19
    Management and Monitoring Capabilities   2.2.2 Telnet  You can access the device through CLI by using Telnet. With Telnet, you can communicate with the device through LAN (switch, hub and so on), the Internet, or with an Ethernet cable connected directly to your computer’s Ethernet port.  2.2.3 Secure Shell (SSH)  You can securely access the device through CLI by using Secure Shell (SSH). The device supports SSH version 2, for secure  remote CLI (Telnet) sessions. SSH provides strong authentication and encryption of session data. The SSH server has host keys  - a pair of asymmetric keys (a private key that resides on the device) and a public key that is distributed to clients that need to connect to the device. Clients need to verify that it is communicating with the correct SSH server.   2.3 SNMP Management  You can also configure, manage and monitor the device by using the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). This requires an SNMP Manager Program (sometimes called MIB browser) or a Network Manager program using SNMP. The device supports the following Management Information Base (MIB) files that describe the parameters that can be viewed and/or configured over SNMP:  •  PXM-SNMP.mib (Enterprise MIB) • RFC-1213.mib (MIB-II) • RFC-1215.mib (Trap MIB) •  RFC-1757-RMON.mib (Remote Monitoring) • RFC-2571.mib (SNMP Framework) •  RFC-3411-SNMP-FRAME-WORK.mib (SNMP Framework) • RFC-2790.mib (Host Resources) • RFC-3291-INET-ADDRESS-MIB.mib • RFC-3412.mib (SNMP-MPD-MIB) • RFC-3414.mib (SNMP-USER-BASED-SM-MIB) • SFLOW.mib The PXM MIB files are available on the Proxim support site (http://support.proxim.com). You must compile one or more of these MIB files into your SNMP program’s database before you manage your device using SNMP.  The enterprise MIB (PXM-SNMP.mib) defines the Read and Read/Write objects that can be viewed or configured using SNMP. These objects correspond to most of the settings and statistics that are available with other management interfaces. The MIB can be opened with any text editor, such as Microsoft Word, Notepad, or WordPad.   2.4 ProximVision ES  ProximVision ES (commonly known as PVES) is Proxim’s Network Management System that helps to manage and administer your wireless network effectively and efficiently. ProximVision ES combines industry-leading functionality with an intuitive user interface, enabling Network Administrators and Help Desk staff to support and control a wireless network.  ProximVision ES offers you a single intelligent console from which you can manage, monitor, analyze and even configure your device.  For  more  information,  see  ProximVision  ES  user  guide  available  at  the  Proxim’s  support  site  at http://support.proxim.com.   : This user guide explains the method to initialize and manage the device using Web Interface only. The Reference Manual, a guide that explains the method to manage the device using Command Line Interface, can be found at Proxim’s support site (http://support.proxim.com).     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  20
3      Device Initialization   This chapter contains information on the following: •   Initialization — ScanTool — Initialize Device using ScanTool — Modifying the IP Address of the Device using ScanTool •   Logging onto the Web Interface — Home Page — COMMIT — REBOOT •   Factory Default Configuration  3.1 Initialization  Once the device installation completes, you can access the device either through Command Line Interface, Web Interface or an SNMP Interface.   : For installation procedure, please refer to the Hardware Installation guide available at Proxim’s support site (http://support.proxim.com).   •  To access the device using CLI commands, connect a serial RS-232 cable to the Serial port of the device. •  To access the device using Web or SNMP interface, connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port of the device. For all the modes of connection, you will need to configure the IP address of the device. As each network is different, a suitable IP address on the network must be assigned to the device. This IP address helps you to configure, manage and monitor the device through the Web Interface, SNMP, or Telnet/CLI. The device can have either a static or dynamic IP address. When set to static, the user has to set the IP address manually; and if set to dynamic, the IP address is obtained dynamically from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server.  By default, the device IP Address is set to 169.254.128.132.    : Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE device does not have a Serial Port. However, the user has the flexibility to configure, manage and monitor the device through command mode via Telnet.  3.1.1 ScanTool  Proxim’s ScanTool (Answer ID - 1735) is a software utility that runs on Microsoft Windows machine. By using ScanTool, you can  •  Scan devices (Proxim devices only) available on the network •  Obtain device’s IP address •  Modify device’s IP Configuration parameters (IP Address, Address Type, Gateway and so on) •  Launch the Web interface •  Switch between the network adapters, if there are multiple network adapters in the Personal Computer    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  21
    Device Initialization     : ScanTool works only for Proxim devices. Also note that you may need to disable Windows Firewall (or add an exception) for ScanTool to function or to detect the radio.  3.1.2 Initialize Device using ScanTool  To scan and locate the devices on a network by using ScanTool, do the following:  1.  Power on, or reset the device.  2.  To download Proxim’s ScanTool, log on to Proxim’s support site at http://support.proxim.com and search for ScanTool    with (Answer ID 1735). Upon successful download, start ScanTool by double-clicking the downloaded icon.  3.  If your computer has more than one network adapter installed, you will be prompted to select the adapter for   scanning Proxim devices. You can use either an Ethernet or a Wireless Adapter. Select an adapter and click OK. The   following ScanList screen appears, which displays all devices that are connected to selected adapter.                Figure 3-1 ScanList - An Example  This screen contains the following device information:  •  MAC Address  •  System Name  •  IP Address  •  Uptime  •  System Description: The system description comprises the following information:   — Device Description: For example, Tsunami MP-8100-BSU-WD   — Firmware Version: For example, v2.4.0  — Serial Number : For example, SN-11PI15010031  — Bootloader Version: For example, BL - V1.3.1  4.  Click Select Adapter, to change adapter settings.  5.  Identify and select the MAC address of the device you want to initialize from the list and click Web Config to log on    to the Web Interface.   : If your device does not appear in the Scan List, click Rescan in the Scan List screen. If the device still does not appear in the list, see Troubleshooting for suggestions. Note that after rebooting the device, it may take up to five minutes for the device to appear in the Scan List.        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  22
    Device Initialization   3.1.3 Modifying the IP Address of the Device using ScanTool  To modify the IP address of a device using ScanTool, select the device from the scan list and click Change. A Change screen appears as shown in the following figure. The system automatically populates the MAC Address, System Name, TFTP Server IP Address and Image File Name of the device, which are read-only.                         Figure 3-2 Modifying Device’s IP Address  1.  Select the IP Address Type as either static or dynamic.  •  Static: When set to static, the IP address of the device is changed manually. •  Dynamic: When set to dynamic, the IP address is dynamically generated by the DHCP server. 2.  Type the appropriate IP Address, Subnet Mask, and the Gateway IP Address parameters.  3.  Enter the SNMP Read/Write password in the Read/Write Password box. By default, it is public.  4.  Click OK to save the details. The device automatically reboots.  To log on to the Web Interface, click Web Configuration.  The user is then prompted to enter its username and password. For more information on how to login, please see Logging onto the Web Interface.   3.2 Logging onto the Web Interface  Once the device is connected to your network, use a web browser to configure, manage and monitor the device. Enter the default IP address of the device (For example, http://169.254.128.132) in the address bar or access the Web Interface using ScanTool (see Initialization).  You are now prompted to enter your username and password.            Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  23
    Device Initialization                  Figure 3-3 Login Screen  Based on the access credentials, two types of users can access the device. They are,  1.  Administrator User: The Administrator user administers the entire device. This user type has the write access to all    the features of the device and also has the privilege to change his or her own password and that of the Monitor user    (the other user type). To change the password, refer to Services.  2.  Monitor User - The Monitor user has only view access to all the features of the device. This user is restricted from the   following privileges:  •  Change the device functionality •  Change his or her own password •  Run any of the test tools like Link Test, Wireless Site Survey and so on. However, the user can view the logs and statistics of the test tools. The Monitor user is given the privilege to retrieve event logs and temperature logs for debugging.   To logon to the device,  1.  Type a valid user name in the User Name box. The user name is admin for the Administrator user and monitor for    the Monitor user.  2.  Type the password in the Password box. By default, the password is public for both the Administrator user and the   Monitor user.    :  •  By default the password is public. For security reasons, it is recommended to change the password after your first logon to the device. •   Depending on the settings made during the device initialization, the IP address may be either a dynamic IP address    assigned by a network DHCP server or a static IP address which is manually configured. Refer to ScanTool for    information on how to determine the device’s IP address and manually configure a new IP address.  •   If the connection is slow or unable to connect, use the Internet Explorer Tools option to ensure that you are not    using a proxy server for the connection.  •  If you are unable to log on to the configuration pages by using default user name and password, please check with the administrator or follow Forced Reload procedures. •   If using Internet Explorer, and you enter wrong password consecutively for three times, the HTTP session will get    disconnected. If case of other browsers, the login screen will reset until you enter correct password.  •   In the Internet Explorer, to get best results, click on Tools > Internet Options > General. Click Settings in the    Browsing History and select “Every visit to the webpage”.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  24
    Device Initialization   3.2.1 Home Page  Upon successful logon, the device home page appears.                              Figure 3-4 Home Page  The home page contains the following information:  •   Device Description: The device description is displayed on the top-right corner of the home page. It displays the    logged in user type and the device name along with the latest firmware version.  •  System Summary: The System Summary screen displays the summary of system information such as System Name, IP Address, Radio Mode, Interface Status, Event Log and so on. •  COMMIT Button: See COMMIT •  REBOOT Button: See REBOOT •  Home: Display System Summary screen. •   BASIC CONFIGURATION: The BASIC CONFIGURATION tab allows the user to configure the minimum set of    parameters required for a device to be operational and establish link in the network. For more details, see Basic   Configuration.  •   ADVANCED CONFIGURATION: The ADVANCED CONFIGURATION tab allows the user to configure the advanced    parameters of the device. For more details, see Advanced Configuration.  •  MANAGEMENT Tab: The MANAGEMENT tab allows the user to manage the device. For more details, see Management. •  MONITOR Tab: The MONITOR tab allows the user to monitor the device. For more details, see Monitor.        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  25
    Device Initialization   3.2.2 COMMIT  COMMIT operation is used to apply the configuration changes onto the device. When changes are made to the configuration parameters of the device, the changes will not take effect, until COMMIT is clicked. Some parameters may require system reboot for the changes to take effect. On clicking COMMIT, the system evaluates all the configuration dependencies and displays the configuration status.  Before applying commit, the system displays a confirmation message, as shown in the following figure:         Figure 3-5 Commit  Click OK, if you wish to commit the changed parameters.  On successful COMMIT operation, the following screen appears:               Figure 3-6 Commit Status  If the configured parameters requires reboot, on committing the following screen appears.                 Figure 3-7 Commit Status with Reboot Message         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  26
    Device Initialization   3.2.3 REBOOT  Reboot operation is required for any change in the key parameters to take effect. For example, settings such as configuring the Radio Mode, IP Address, and Network Mode need reboot to take effect.  It is recommended that the device must be rebooted immediately after modifying a rebootable parameter. On clicking Reboot, system displays a confirmation window, as shown below.          Figure 3-8 Reboot  : It is always mandatory to commit the changes before REBOOT, otherwise the changes will not take effect. To reboot the device, click OK.   3.3 Factory Default Configuration   Parameter  BSU Mode/  SU Mode/ End Point A  End Point B User Password  Public  Public System Name  System-Name  System-Name Network Mode  Bridge  Bridge Routing Disabled Disabled IP Address  169.254.128.132  169.254.128.132 Subnet Mask  255.255.255.0  255.255.255.0 Address Type  Static  Static Gateway IP Address  169.254.128.132  169.254.128.132 Network Name  MY_NETWORK  MY_NETWORK Maximum Number of SUs (per BSU)  As per license  Not Applicable Registration Timeout  10 Seconds  10 Seconds DDRS Enabled Enabled Input Bandwidth Limit  As per license  As per license Output Band Limit  As per license  As per license Security Profile  Enabled with profile name  Enabled with profile name “WORP Security”  “WORP Security”      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  27
    Device Initialization    Parameter  BSU Mode/  SU Mode/ End Point A  End Point B RADIUS Profile  Enabled with profile name  Not Applicable “Default Radius” MAC Authentication  Disabled  Not Applicable RADIUS MAC Authentication  Disabled  Not Applicable Channel Bandwidth  20 MHz  20 MHz Active Channel Selection  Disabled  Enabled ATPC Enabled Enabled Network Secret  Public  Public QoS  Unlimited BE  Not Applicable Management VLAN  Disabled  Disabled VLAN Status  Disabled  Disabled VLAN Mode (Ethernet)  Transparent  Transparent Global Filtering  Disabled  Disabled DHCP Server  Disabled  Disabled STP/LACP  Enabled (configured as  Enabled (configured as “passthru”) “passthru”) DHCP Relay  Disabled  Disabled IGMP Snooping  Disabled  Disabled RIP Disabled Disabled NAT Disabled Disabled PPPoE Client  Not Applicable  Disabled in SU Mode Not Applicable in End Point B HTTP Management Interface  Enabled  Enabled Telnet Management Interface  Enabled  Enabled SNMP Management Interface  Enabled with SNMPv1-v2c  Enabled with SNMPv1-v2c Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)  Disabled  Disabled Management Access Control  Disabled  Disabled Event Log Priority  Notice  Notice SysLog Status  Enabled  Enabled SysLog Priority  Critical  Critical        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  28
4      Basic Configuration    The BASIC CONFIGURATION tab provides a one-place access to a minimum set of configuration parameters to quickly set up a Point-to-point or Point-to-multipoint network.  To configure basic parameters of the device, click BASIC CONFIGURATION tab. The following screen appears:                                Figure 4-1 Basic Configuration (BSU)                          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  29
    Basic Configuration                                  Figure 4-2 Basic Configuration (SU)                                       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  30
    Basic Configuration                                   Figure 4-3 Basic Configuration (End Point B)  Tabulated below is the table which explains Basic parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description System Name  Represents the system name of the device. By default, the system name is System-Name. You can change the system name to the desired one. Please note that the length of the name is limited to 64 characters.                          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  31
    Basic Configuration    Parameter Description Frequency Domain  This parameter specifies the country of operation, permitted frequency bands and regulatory rules for that particular country or domain. When you choose a frequency  domain, the Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) features are enabled automatically if the selected country and band has a  regulatory domain that requires it. The Frequency domain selection pre-selects and displays only the allowed frequencies for the selected country or domain.   :   •   Devices sold only in United States are pre-configured to scan and display only the    outdoor frequencies permitted by the Federal Communications Commission    (FCC). No other countries, channels, or frequencies can be configured. Devices    sold outside United States support the selection of a country by the professional    installer. Any change in the Frequency Domain, requires device reboot.  •   If World 5 GHz is selected from the Frequency Domain drop-down menu,    channels only in the 5 GHz range are displayed for manual selection.   For a non US device, the default Frequency Domain selected is World 5GHz. For more details on frequency domains, refer to Frequency Domains and Channels.  Radio Mode  Represents the radio mode of the device. Based on the SKU, the radio mode is set to either BSU, SU, End Point A or End Point B.   In case of a BSU device, you can toggle between BSU and SU modes. Similarly in case of  End Point A device, you can toggle between End Point A and End Point B. But note that a  change in radio mode will reset wireless and WORP parameters of the device after reboot.  Channel Bandwidth  Represents the width of the frequency band that is used to transmit data on the wireless interface. By default, it is set to 20 MHz. 40 MHz can be selected for higher throughputs depending on the distance and signal quality. 5 and 10 MHz can be selected for greater flexibility in spectrum selection. Auto Channel  Enables a device to select the best channel for data transmission on the wireless medium, Selection (ACS)  with less interference. By default, ACS is disabled on a BSU/End Point A and enabled on a SU/End Point B device. When ACS is enabled on a BSU/End Point A, it scans all the  channels and selects the best channel during the start up. If ACS is enabled on the SU/End  Point B, it continuously scans all the channels till it connects to a BSU or End Point A  respectively.   : Irrespective of the ACS status, the BSU/Endpoint A will automatically select a new channel upon radar detection.  Preferred Channel  Applicable only when the Auto Channel Selection (ACS) is disabled. This parameter enables you to select a specific channel (in the specified frequency domain) for the device to operate. Active Channel  Displays the current active channel on which wireless interface is operating. When the Auto Channel Selection parameter is enabled or when the device moves to a different channel because of radar detection, this parameter enables you to view the current operating channel.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  32
    Basic Configuration    Parameter Description DDRS Status  Applicable only when Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) is enabled on the device. It indicates that DDRS is enabled on the device. See DDRS.  Tx Rate  Applicable only when Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) is disabled on the device. This parameter represents the data transmission rate of the device. You can configure the appropriate data rate based on the signal level.   : A change in Channel Bandwidth will reset the Tx Rate to default value.    Network Name   Network name to identify a wireless network. The network name can be of minimum 2 or  maximum 32 characters. The default network name is MY_NETWORK.   : For a BSU and SU to establish a wireless link, both should in the same network. The same applies to End Point A and End Point B as well.  Legacy Mode  Applicable only to Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU device.  When enabled, allows the device to operate with the legacy products of the Tsunami® MP.11 family such as: MP.11 5054 series, 5012 series, 2454 series and so on. By default, this parameter is disabled.  BSU / End Point A  Applicable only to a SU/End Point B device. Name  Represents the BSU/End Point A name to which SU/End Point B is connected.  IP Configuration, and  See Network. Default Gateway IP  Address   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.    : Reboot the device, if you have configured any of the parameters with an asterisk symbol marked against them.                             Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  33
5      Advanced Configuration    The ADVANCED CONFIGURATION tab provides a means to configure the following advanced features of the device: •  System •  Network •  Ethernet •  Wireless •  Security •  Quality of Service (QoS) •  RADIUS Based SU QoS Configuration •  VLAN (Bridge Mode Only) •  RADIUS Based SU VLAN Configuration •  Filtering (Bridge Only) •  DHCP •  IGMP Snooping •  Routing Mode Features  5.1 System  The System tab enables you to configure system specific information.  To configure system specific parameters, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > System. The System screen appears:                Figure 5-1 System Configuration  Tabulated below is the table which explains System parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Radio Mode  Represents the radio mode of the device. Based on the device, the radio mode is set to either BSU, SU, End Point A or End Point B. In case of a BSU device, you can toggle  between BSU and SU modes. Similarly in case of End Point A or End Point B device, you can toggle between End Point A and End Point B. But note that a change in radio mode will reset wireless and WORP parameters of the device after reboot.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  34
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Frequency Domain  A valid frequency domain must be set before the device can be configured with any other parameters. Selecting a frequency domain makes the device compliant with the allowed frequency bands and channels for that regulatory domain. See Frequency Domain. Network Mode  The device can be configured in two network modes: Bridge and Routing. By default, the network mode is Bridge mode. Active Network Mode  A change in the network mode (either Bridge or Routing mode) is applied on the device only when the device is rebooted.  So, when the network mode is changed and the device is not rebooted, this parameter displays the current operating network mode of the device. Maximum MTU  Largest size of the data packet that can be sent to/from the Ethernet interface of the (Maximum  device. By default, the MTU size is 1500 bytes. It can be configured with any value ranging Transmission Unit)  from 1500 to 2048 bytes. The MTU size excludes Ethernet Header(14 bytes) + Frame Check Sequence (4 bytes) + VLAN Tag(4 bytes).    :  •  Not all devices support this parameter. •  MTU is configurable only in Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE, Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE and Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-12/50 devices. •  For optimal performance, MTU should be configured same on both local and remote devices. •   By default, Maximum MTU for Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU, Tsunami®  MP-8100-SUA, MP-8150-SUR, Tsunami® MP-8160-BSU, Tsunami®  MP-8160-SUA, Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA, Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR is not  configurable and set to 1500 excluding Ethernet Header(14 bytes) + Frame Check Sequence (4 bytes) + VLAN Tag(4 bytes).  Frequency Filter Lower  These parameters enable you to define the lower and upper frequency band edges, which Edge, and  helps to limit the available frequency band, for a given frequency domain, to a smaller Frequency Filter Upper  band. By limiting the frequency band, the time taken by a device to scan and connect to Edge  any other device in the network is reduced.  You can enter frequencies ranging from 0 to 10000 MHz. By default the lower frequency is set to 0 MHz and higher frequency is set to 10000 MHz.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK, COMMIT and then REBOOT.   5.2 Network  The Network tab allows you to view and configure the network specific information of the device.  To view the current operating network mode of the device, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Network. If the network mode of the device is configured in Bridge mode, then following screen appears:          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  35
    Advanced Configuration            Figure 5-2 Bridge Mode  If the network mode of the device is configured in Routing mode, then the following screen appears:           Figure 5-3 Routing Mode  5.2.1 IP Configuration (Bridge Mode)  To configure the IP parameters of the device when operating in Bridge mode, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Network > IP Configuration. The following IP Configuration screen appears:                      Figure 5-4 IP Configuration (Bridge Mode)  Tabulated below is the table which explains the method to configure IP parameters in Bridge mode:   Parameter Description Ethernet Please note that the number of Ethernet interfaces depend on your device.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  36
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Address Type  Specifies whether the Ethernet interface parameters are to be configured through Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) or to be assigned statically.   By default, the address type is set to Static meaning which the user can manually  configure the network parameters. Select Dynamic to configure the device as a DHCP  client. If Dynamic is selected, the device obtains the IP parameters from a network DHCP server automatically during the bootup. If you do not have a DHCP server or if you want to manually configure the device’s IP settings, select Static.   : DHCP Client (IP Address Type Dynamic) is applicable in Bridge Mode, and is  applicable on wireless interface in Routing mode only when PPPoE is enabled .  IP Address  Represents the IP address of the Ethernet interface.  When the address type is set to Static  (default address type), the static IP address by  default is set to 169.254.128.132. When set to static, you can manually change the IP  address.   When the address type is set to Dynamic, this parameter is read-only and displays the device IP address obtained from the DHCP server. The device will fallback to  169.254.128.132, if it cannot obtain the IP address from the DHCP server.  Subnet Mask  Represents the subnet mask of the Ethernet interface.  When the address type is set to Static (default address type), the subnet mask by default is set to 255.255.255.0. When set to static, you can manually change the subnet mask.   When the address type is set to Dynamic, this parameter is read-only and displays the  device current subnet mask obtained from the DHCP server. The subnet mask will fallback  to 255.255.255.0, if the device cannot obtain the subnet mask from the DHCP server.  Default Gateway IP Address  IP Address  Represents the gateway IP address of the device.  When the address type is set to Static (default address type), the gateway IP address by default is set to 169.254.128.132. When set to static, you can manually change the  gateway IP address.   When the address type is set to Dynamic, this parameter is read-only and displays the  device’s current gateway IP address that is obtained from the DHCP server. The gateway IP  address will fallback to 169.254.128.132, if it cannot obtain the gateway IP address from a  DHCP server.  DNS  Primary IP Address  Represents the IP address of the Primary DNS Server.  When the address type is set to Dynamic, this parameter is read-only and displays the DNS Primary IP Address obtained from the DHCP server. If the address type is set to Static, then you will have to manually enter the primary IP Address.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  37
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Secondary IP Address  Represents the IP address of the Secondary DNS Server.  When the address type is set to Dynamic, this parameter is read-only and displays the DNS Secondary IP Address obtained from the DHCP server. If the address type is set to Static then you will have to manually enter the secondary IP Address.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK, COMMIT and then REBOOT.  5.2.2 IP Configuration (Routing Mode)  To configure the IP parameters of the device when operating in Routing mode, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Network. The IP Configuration screen appears:                             Figure 5-5 IP Configuration (Routing Mode)  Tabulated below is the table which explains the method to configure IP parameters in Routing mode:   Parameter Description Ethernet Please note that the number of Ethernet interfaces depend on your device.          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  38
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description IP Address  Represents the IP address of the Ethernet interface.  By default, the static IP address for Ethernet1 is set to 169.254.128.132 and for Ethernet2 it is set to 169.254.129.132.   You can manually change the IP address.  Subnet Mask  Represents the subnet mask of the Ethernet interface.  By default, the static subnet mask is set to 255.255.255.0. You can manually change the subnet mask.  Wireless  IP Address  Represents the IP address of the wireless interface.  By default, the static IP address is set to 169.254.130.132. You can manually change the IP  address.  Subnet Mask  Represents the subnet mask of the wireless interface.  By default, the static subnet mask is set to 255.255.255.0. You can manually change the subnet mask. Default Gateway IP Address IP Address  Represents the gateway IP address of the device.  By default, the Gateway IP address is set to 169.254.128.132. You can manually change the gateway IP address. DNS Primary IP Address  Represents the IP Address of the Primary DNS Server. Secondary IP Address  Represents the IP Address of the Secondary DNS Server.  After configuring the required parameters, click OK, COMMIT and then REBOOT.    :   • To obtain dynamic IP address of the SU over WORP,  • Scenario 1: When BSU and SU are in Bridge Mode with DHCP Client enabled in SU, and if DHCP server is behind BSU, SU will get the IP Address over WORP.  • Scenario 2: When BSU is in Routing Mode and SU is in Bridge mode and DHCP server is in a different network than SU, then we need to configure DHCP relay in BSU to get the IP for SU over WORP.  • Scenario 3: When BSU is in Routing mode and SU in Bridge mode with DHCP server running on wireless interface of BSU, then SU will get the IP address from BSU.         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  39
    Advanced Configuration   5.2.3 IP Configuration (Routing Mode with PPPoE Client Enabled)    : IP Configuration in Routing mode with PPPoE client enabled is applicable only in SU mode. See PPPoE End Point (SU Only)   To configure the IP parameters of the device when configured in Routing mode with PPPoE client enabled, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Network. The IP Configuration screen appears:                           Figure 5-6 IP Configuration (Routing Mode with PPPoE Client Enabled)  Tabulated below is the table which explains the method to configure IP parameters in Routing mode with PPPoE client  enabled:   Parameter Description Ethernet  Please note that the number of Ethernet interfaces depend on your device.  IP Address  Represents the IP address of the Ethernet interface.  By default, the static IP address for Ethernet1 is set to 169.254.128.132 and 169.254.129.132 for Ethernet2. You can manually change the IP address. Subnet Mask  Represents the subnet mask of the Ethernet interface.  By default, the static subnet mask is set to 255.255.255.0. You can manually change the subnet mask.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  40
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Wireless (PPPoE)  Address Type  This parameter specifies whether the wireless interface parameters are to be configured through PPPoE server or to be assigned statically.   By default, the address type is set to PPPoE-ipcp meaning which the PPPoE client obtains the IP parameters from a network PPPoE server automatically during the bootup. To  manually configure the PPPoE Client’s IP settings, select Static.  IP Address  Represents the IP address of the wireless interface.  When the address type is set to PPPoE-ipcp, this parameter is read-only and displays the PPPoE client’s IP address obtained from the PPPoE server. The client will fallback to  169.254.130.132, if it cannot obtain the IP address from the PPPoE server.   When the address type is set to Static, the IP address by default is set to 169.254.130.132. You can manually change the IP address.  Subnet Mask  Represents the subnet mask of the wireless interface.  When the address type is set to PPPoE-ipcp, this parameter is read-only and is set to Host Mask as it is a point-to-point interface. The client will fallback to 255.255.255.0, if it  cannot obtain the IP address from the PPPoE server.   When the address type is set to Static, the subnet mask by default is set to 255.255.255.0. You can manually change the subnet mask.  Default Gateway IP Address  IP Address  Represents the gateway IP address of the device.  When the address type is set to PPPoE-ipcp, this parameter is read-only and displays the  PPPoE client’s gateway IP address (which is nothing but the IP address of the PPPoE server).  If it cannot obtain the IP address from a PPPoE server, then there will be no gateway for  the device.   When the address type is set to Static, the gateway IP address by default is set to 169.254.128.132. You can manually change the gateway IP address.  DNS  Primary IP Address  Represents the IP Address of the Primary DNS Server. Secondary IP Address  Represents the IP Address of the Secondary DNS Server.  After configuring the required parameters, click OK, COMMIT and then REBOOT.             Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  41
    Advanced Configuration   5.3 Ethernet  The Ethernet tab allows you to view and configure the Ethernet interface properties of the device.  5.3.1 Basic Ethernet Configuration  To view and perform basic Ethernet configuration, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Ethernet. The Ethernet Interface Properties screen appears:                Figure 5-7 Basic Ethernet Configuration  Tabulated below is the table which explains Basic Ethernet parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description MAC Address  Displays the MAC address of the Ethernet interface. Operational Speed  Displays the current operational speed of the Ethernet interface.  Tabulated below is the maximum operational speed of the Ethernet interface product wise:  Product Maximum Speed • Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU  1 Gbps • Tsunami® MP-8100-SUA  • Tsunami® MP-8150-SUR  • Tsunami® MP-8160-BSU  • Tsunami® MP-8160-SUA  • Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA  • Tsunami® QB-8100-LNK  • Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR  • Tsunami® QB-8150-LNK  • Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE  100 Mbps • Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE • Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-12/50     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  42
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Operational Tx Mode  Displays the current operational transmission mode of the Ethernet interface. It supports two types of transmission modes: •  Half Duplex: Allows one-way data transmission at a time. •  Full Duplex: Allows two-way transmission simultaneously. Speed And TxMode  Enables the user to select the speed and transmission mode of the Ethernet interface. By default, it is set to Auto. When set to Auto (recommended to set), both the transmitter and the receiver negotiate and derive at the best transmission mode.   : Please ensure the same transmission modes are configured on the transmitter and the receiver device.  Admin Status  This parameter is applicable only when the device support more than one Ethernet interface. By default, both the Ethernet interfaces of the device are enabled. The first  Ethernet interface is always enabled; whereas the second Ethernet interface can be either enabled or disabled as desired.  After configuring the required parameters, click OK  and then COMMIT.  Reboot the device, if you have changed the Admin Status configuration.  5.3.2 Advanced Configuration  The Advanced Configuration feature enables you to achieve high availability and link aggregation in wireless medium by using two parallel links and additional Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) capable switches.  : Applicable only to Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA, Tsunami® QB-8100-LNK, Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR, and Tsunami® QB-8150-LNK.  To view and perform advanced Ethernet configuration, click Advanced in the Ethernet Interface Properties screen. The following screen appears:                  Figure 5-8 Advanced Ethernet Configuration            Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  43
    Advanced Configuration   Tabulated below is the table which explains Advanced Ethernet parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Auto Shutdown  This parameter facilitates LACP capable Ethernet switches to use two Quick Bridge links to achieve higher throughput and redundancy. By default, it is Disabled.   If Auto Shutdown is enabled on the Ethernet Interface, then the Ethernet port will be  automatically disabled, when the wireless link goes down. It will be automatically enabled once the wireless link is up again.    : This feature works only if STP/LACP Frames is set to passthru (See ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Filtering)   Tsunami® Quick Bridge devices that are part of LACP link cannot be managed through the switches, so it is recommended to use the second ethernet port for management.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.   5.4 Wireless  The Wireless tab allows you to configure the wireless properties for the radio interface of the device.  5.4.1 Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol (WORP)  WORP is protocol, designed by Proxim that protects the network from packet collisions and solves the hidden node problem to transmit the data in an optimal way.  To configure the WORP properties, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Wireless > Interface1 > WORP. The WORP Configuration screen appears:                                   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  44
    Advanced Configuration                                      Figure 5-9 WORP Configuration  Tabulated below is the table which explains WORP parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Mode  Represents the device type (BSU, SU, End Point A or End Point B) BSU Name  Applicable only to SU. It specifies the name of the BSU to which a SU can establish wireless connection. If this parameter is left blank, SU can establish a link with any BSU.  End Point A Name   Applicable only in End Point B mode. It specifies the name of the End Point A to which End  Point B can establish wireless connection. If this parameter is left blank, End Point B can establish a link with any End Point A.  Network Name  It is a unique name given to a logical network. Devices only within this logical network can establish wireless connection.  The Network Name can be of 2 to 32 characters in length. By default it is MY_NETWORK.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  45
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Max SUs  Represents the maximum number of SUs that can register with a BSU. The maximum SUs are limited to the licensed number of SUs.   : Applicable only in BSU mode.    WORP MTU  WORP MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) is the largest size of the data payload in wireless frame that can be transmitted. The MTU size can range from 350 to 3808 bytes for High  throughput modes and 350 to 2304 bytes for legacy mode. The default and maximum  value of the WORP MTU is 3808 bytes for higher throughput and 2304 bytes for legacy  mode.  Super Framing   Super Framing refers to the mechanism that enables multiple Ethernet/802.3 frames to be  packed in a single WORP data frame. When the WORP MTU size is configured larger than the Ethernet frame size, then WORP constructs a super frame with size of the WORP MTU configured and pack multiple Ethernet frames. It results in reducing the number of frames transmitted over wireless medium thereby conserving wireless medium and increasing the overall throughput. By default it is Enabled.  Sleep Mode  A BSU can put SUs in sleep mode when there is no data transmission during the past 15 seconds. This reduces the traffic congestion in the wireless medium and preserves the  wireless bandwidth for other SUs in the network. BSU polls sleeping SUs once in every 4 seconds to maintain the wireless connection. By default, it is Disabled.   : Applicable only in BSU mode.    Multi Frame Bursting   To achieve higher throughput, WORP protocol allows the transmitter or receiver to send  multiple data frames in sequence without waiting for acknowledgment for every data  frame and treats it as a single burst. During the burst transmission, the receiver is not  allowed to interrupt the transmitter. After compilation of the burst, the receiver response by sending the acknowledgement.   By default, the Multi Frame Bursting feature is Enabled on the device. When Multi Frame Bursting is enabled, the maximum data frames that can be transmitted for each burst can be configured as part of Quality of Service (QoS).   : Though Multi Frame Bursting configuration is not applicable from SU/End Point B, the SU/End Point B does Multi Frame Bursting under the control of BSU/End Point A respectively.                   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  46
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Auto Multi Frame  Auto Multi Frame Bursting feature takes effect only when Multi Frame Bursting feature is Bursting Enabled.  When this feature is enabled, the device monitors all active QoS Service Flow Classes and determines the highest priority QoS Service Flow Class for every wireless connection. The device enables the burst transmission for the active highest priority QoS Service Flow Class and disables the burst transmission for other active lower priority QoS Service Flow Classes. By default, Auto Multi Frame Bursting is Enabled on the device.    :   • When using Software Version 2.4.0, it is recommended to disable Auto Multi Frame Bursting.  • Though Auto Multi Frame Bursting configuration is not applicable from  SU/End Point B, the SU/End Point B does Auto Multi Frame Bursting under the control of BSU/End Point A respectively.  Registration Timeout   Represents the maximum time for a SU to register with a BSU or vice versa, or an End Point  B to register with an End Point A or vice versa. The registration timeout value can be set in the range 1 to 10 seconds. The default registration timeout value is 10 seconds.  Retry Count  Represents the maximum number of times the data is retransmitted by the transmitter over the wireless medium, if acknowledgement from the peer is not received. The Retry  Count parameter can be configured in the range 0 to 10 seconds. By default, it is set to 3.  DDRS Status  : Applicable only when DDRS is enabled.   It is a read-only parameter that displays the status of the DDRS feature. For more details refer to DDRS.  Tx Rate  Represents the modulation rate at which the packets are transmitted from the wireless device. Please note that the a change in Channel Bandwidth, Guard Interval and Number of Data Streams will reset Tx rate to default values.   : Applicable only when the DDRS is disabled on the device. See DDRS.    Input or Output  This parameter limits the data received or transmitted to the wireless interface. It limits the Bandwidth Limit  data from a minimum of 64 Kbps to the maximum value specified in the License File.  : Input/Output Bandwidth throttling does not throttle broadcast/multicast traffic. These traffic can be trottled by the Maximum Information Rate (MIR) /  Committed Information Rate (CIR) configured for DL-L2 Broadcast BE in QoS Service Flow. See QoS Service Flow Configuration (SFC)          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  47
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Bandwidth Limit Type  Specifies the action performed when the traffic utilization exceeds the configured input or output limits. By default it is set to Shaping.  •  Policing: When the traffic utilization reaches the configured limit, the excess traffic    will be discarded.  •  Shaping: When the traffic utilization reaches the configured limit, the excess traffic    will be buffered and sent at the rate specified in the Output Bandwidth Limit.  Security Profile Name  The Security Profile Name represents the encryption method used to encrypt the data over the wireless medium. The default configured Security Profile Name is WORP Security. See Security. Radius Profile Name  The Radius Profile Name, containing the IP address of the RADIUS server, is used to authenticate a SU or an End Point B. See RADIUS.   : Not applicable in SU mode and End Point B mode.    MAC ACL Status  When enabled, based on the configured ACL list, the BSU/End Point A decides if SU/End Point B can register with them respectively.   : Not applicable in SU mode and End Point B mode.    Radius MAC ACL  This parameter is used to enable authentication using RADIUS server. When enabled, the Status  BSU or End Point A contacts the RADIUS server for authenticating the SU or End Point B during the registration process.   : Not applicable in SU mode and End Point B mode.    Poll BackOff on  When enabled, the BSU will back-off polling the SUs that timeout (due to interference or Timeout  low SNR etc).  When multiple SUs are connected, it is possible that some SUs are performing well without  much retransmissions and other SUs are timing out. In such as scenario to make sure that  the good SUs do not suffer due to under performing SUs it is recommended to enable this  parameter.   By default this parameter is disabled. It is recommended that this parameter should be  enabled only when there is a mix of good and bad SUs and when good SUs are really  suffering.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.    :   • Modifying any of the WORP parameters result in temporary loss of connectivity between transmitter and receiver.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  48
    Advanced Configuration    • MAC ACL Status and Radius MAC ACL Status parameters cannot be enabled simultaneously.  • When you modify WORP parameters and click COMMIT, it may result in brief interruption.    5.4.2 Wireless Interface Properties  To configure the wireless interface properties, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION >  Wireless  > Interface 1 > Properties. The Wireless Interface Properties screen appears depending on your device:                                 Figure 5-10 Wireless Interface Properties  The Wireless Interface Properties screen is classified under two categories: Basic and Advanced.                      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  49
    Advanced Configuration    Basic Configuration  Under Basic Configuration screen, you can configure and view the following parameters.   Parameter Descriptions Channel Bandwidth  By default, the channel bandwidth is set to 20 MHz. 40 MHz can be selected for higher throughputs depending on the distance and signal quality. 5 and 10 MHz can be selected for greater flexibility in spectrum selection.   : A change in Channel Bandwidth will reset the Tx Rate and Maximum EIRP to  default.  Channel Offset  : Applicable only to Tsunami® MP-8160-BSU; Tsunami® MP-8160-SUA; Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE; Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE; Tsunami®  QB-8150-EPR-12/50 devices.   The Channel Offset parameter helps to change the operating channel center frequency. If the predefined center frequencies are not desirable, user can shift the center frequency to suit the requirements by configuring the Channel Offset. By default, the Channel Offset is set to 0. You can configure the Channel Offset in the range -2 to +2 MHz.   For example, consider a channel number 100 with center channel frequency set to 5500 MHz. If the Channel Offset is set to 0 MHz, the center channel frequency remains at 5500 MHz. If you configure the Channel Offset to 2MHz then the center channel frequency will change to 5502MHz. Similarly for a Channel Offset of -2MHz, the center channel  frequency is changed to 5498 MHz.   : Even though the center channel frequency is changed, the channel number still remains same, in this case 100.  Auto Channel  Auto Channel Selection (ACS) enables the device to determine the best channel for Selection (ACS)  wireless data transmission with less interference.  If ACS is enabled on the BSU/End Point A, it scans all the channels and selects the best channel at the startup. If ACS is enabled on the SU/End Point B, it continuously scans all the channels till it finds a suitable BSU/End Point A and connects to it. By default, ACS is disabled on BSU/End Point A and enabled on SU/End Point B.   : On BSU/End Point A, ACS is performed only during startup.    Preferred Channel  Allows the user to select and operate in the preferred channel.  Preferred channel can be configured only when ACS is disabled. If Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is active, the device will automatically pick a new channel when radar interference is detected.        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  50
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Descriptions Active Channel  A read-only parameter that displays the current operating channel on which the wireless interface is operating.   : Active Channel can be different from Preferred Channel if radar interface is  detected.  Satellite Density   Satellite Density setting helps achieve maximum bandwidth in a wireless network. It  influences the receive sensitivity of the radio interface and improves operation in environments with high noise level. Reducing the sensitivity of the device enables unwanted “noise” to be filtered out (it disappears under the threshold).   You can configure the Satellite Density to be Disable, Large, Medium, Small, Mini, or  Micro. By default, Satellite Density is set to Large. The Medium, Small, Mini, and Micro  settings are appropriate for higher noise environments; whereas, Large is appropriate for a  lower noise environment. A long distance link can have difficulty in maintaining a  connection with a small density setting because the wanted signal can disappear under  the threshold. Consider both noise level and distance between the peers in a link when  configuring this setting. The threshold should be chosen higher than the noise level, but  sufficiently below the signal level. A safe value is 10dB below the present signal strength.   If the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) is not sufficient, you may need to set a lower data rate or  use antennas with higher gain to increase the margin between wanted and unwanted  signals. In a point-to-multipoint link, the BSU or End Point A should have a density setting  suitable for an SU or End Point B, especially the ones with the lowest signal levels (longest  links). Take care when configuring a remote interface; check the available signal level first,  using Remote Link Test.   Tabulated below are the Sensitivity Threshold Values corresponding to various Satellite Density values:   Satellite Density  Receive Sensitivity  Defer Threshold Threshold Large  -96 dbm  -62 dbm Medium  -86 dbm  -62 dbm Small  -78 dbm  -52 dbm Mini  -70 dbm  -42 dbm Micro  -62 dbm  -36 dbm    : When the remote interface is accidentally set to small and communication is lost,  it cannot be reconfigured remotely and a local action is required to restore the  communication link. Therefore, the best place to experiment with the level is at  the device that can be managed without going through the link. If the link is  lost, the setting can be adjusted to the correct level to bring the link back.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  51
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Descriptions ATPC Status  If Adaptive Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is enabled, then the device automatically adjusts the transmit power to avoid saturation of remote receiver, which could cause data errors leading to lower throughput and link outage. If disabled, user can manually adjust the transmit power. By default, ATPC is enabled on the device.   Transmit Power Control (TPC) is calculated based on two factors:  •  Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power (EIRP)  •  Maximum Optimal SNR  •  Antenna Gain   : In BSU, the ATPC considers the EIRP only; where as in SU, End Point A and End Point B both EIRP and Maximum SNR are considered.                                                             Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  52
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Descriptions Max EIRP  The maximum effective power that a radio antenna is allowed to radiate as per the regulatory standard. By default, the maximum EIRP is set as per the regulatory requirements for each frequency domain.   Tabulated below are the default maximum EIRP values that are set according to regulatory  domain:   Regulatory Frequency  Max EIRP (dBm) Domain (MHz) PTP Mode (QB)  PTMP Mode (MP) World All  Unlimited (100) Unlimited (100) United States  2402-2472  32 + 2/3(antenna  BSU: 36 gain)  SU/CPE: 32 + 2/3 (antenna gain) 4940 - 4990  33 (20 MHz)  33 (20 MHz) 30 (10 MHz)  30 (10 MHz) 27 (5 MHz)  27 (5 MHz) 5250 - 5330  30  30 5735 - 5835  53  36 Canada  4940 - 4990  33 (20 MHz)  33 (20 MHz) 30 (10 MHz)  30 (10 MHz) 27 (5 MHz)  27 (5 MHz) 5250 - 5330  30  30 5490 - 5590  30  30 5650 - 5710  30  30 5730 - 5860  53  36 Europe  2402 - 2472  20  20 (including UK)  5490 - 5590  30  30 5650 - 5710  30  30 5735 - 5875  36  36 Russia  5150 - 5350  33  33 5350 - 5650  Unlimited (100)  Unlimited (100) 5650 - 6425  53  53 Taiwan  5490 - 5710  30  30 5735 - 5835  36  36       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  53
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Descriptions   Regulatory Frequency  Max EIRP (dBm) Domain (MHz)  PTP Mode  PTMP Mode India 5825 - 5875 36  36 Brazil 5470 - 5725 30  30 5725 - 5850  Unlimited (100)  32 + 2/3(antenna gain) Australia  5470 - 5600  30 (20 and 40 MHz)  30 (20 and 40 MHz) 27 (10 MHz)  27 (10 MHz) 24 (5 MHz)  24 (5 MHz) 5650 - 5725  30 (20 and 40 MHz)  30 (20 and 40 MHz) 27 (10 MHz)  27 (10 MHz) 24 (5 MHz)  24 (5 MHz) 5725 - 5850  36  36  :   •  The maximum EIRP is not defined in the above table then it is set to 100 (unlimited EIRP). •  Maximum EIRP criterion is enforced only when ATPC is enabled. Active TPC  A read-only parameter which displays the TPC applied by the device to adjust the transmit power, when ATPC is enabled.   : In case of BSU, the Active TPC refers to the TPC applied to the broadcast  packets. To view Active TPC of each link, refer to SU / End Point B Link  Statistics.  Active EIRP  A read-only parameter which displays the current EIRP that a radio antenna radiates. Active Power  A read-only parameter which displays the current power radiated by the radio.                         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  54
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Descriptions TPC  This parameter enables you to manually set the Transmit Power Control (TPC) value when ATPC is disabled. You can manually set TPC ranging from 0 to 25 dBm.   With TPC, you can adjust the output power of the device to a lower level. This is  performed to reduce interference with the neighboring devices. It can be helpful when higher gain antenna is used without violating the maximum radiated output power for a country or regulatory domain. By default, it is set to 0 dBm.   :   •  TPC only lets you decrease the output power; it does not let you increase the output power beyond the maximum allowed defaults for the selected frequency and country. •  TPC can be configured in the steps of 0.5 dB Antenna Gain  The sensitivity of the radio card can be modified when detecting radar signals in accordance with ETSI, FCC, and IC Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) requirements. As the radar detection threshold is fixed by ETSI, the FCC, and IC and a variety of antennas with different gains may be attached to the device, you must adjust this threshold to account for higher than expected antenna gains. This can avoid false radar detection events which can result in frequent change in the Frequency channels.   Configure the threshold for radar detection at the radio card to compensate for increased external antenna gains. The Antenna Gain value ranges from 0 to 40 dBi. For devices with connectorized antenna, the Antenna Gain by default is set to zero dBi.   Tabulated below are the default Antenna Gain, for devices with integrated antenna:  Product (s)  Antenna Gain Tsunami® MP-8150-SUR  23 dBi Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE  16 dBi Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE  15 dBi Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR/  23 dBi Tsunami® QB-8150-LNK Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-12/50  16 dBi  Wireless Inactivity  Resets the wireless interface if there is no change in the Tx and Rx Packet Count in the Timer  specified interval of time. The default value is set to 10 seconds (disabled if set to 0 seconds) and can be configured between 5 to 600 seconds.               Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  55
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Descriptions Legacy Mode  When Legacy Mode is enabled, the BSU can interoperate with the legacy products of the Tsunami MP.11 family: MP.11 5054 series, 5012 series, 2454 series and so on.   By default, it is disabled.   : Applicable only to Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU.    After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.  Reboot the device, if you have changed any of the Wireless Interface parameters with asterisk (*) symbol marked against  them.  Advanced  To view Advanced parameters, click Advanced tab in the Wireless Interface Properties screen. The following screen  appears:                Figure 5-11 Advanced Wireless Properties  The following table lists the Advanced  Wireless properties parameters and their description. Note that these parameters are read-only and can be configured only through CLI or SNMP.   Parameter Description ATPC Lower Margin  SNR Upper Limit = Maximum Optimal SNR and  SNR Initial = SNR Upper Limit - ATPC Upper Margin ATPC Upper Margin  SNR Lower Limit = SNR Initial - ATPC Lower Margin  ATPC Algorithm, after reducing the power to honor the Maximum EIPR limit, adjusts the  power based on Maximum Optimal SNR, ATPC Upper Margin and ATPC Lower Margin. To  begin with, ATPC will adjust the power to bring the SNR to SNR Initial and adjusts power  only when the current SNR goes beyond the SNR Upper Limit and SNR Lower Limit.   Click Local SNR-Table, to view the optimal SNR values that are exchanged with the peer for optimal throughput.          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  56
    Advanced Configuration   5.4.3 MIMO Properties  The MIMO Properties tab allows you to configure the Multiple-Input-Multiple-Output (MIMO) parameters that enable to achieve high throughput and longer range.  To configure MIMO properties, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Wireless > Interface1 > MIMO Properties. The MIMO Properties screen appears:                      Figure 5-12 3x3 MIMO Properties                     Figure 5-13 2x2 MIMO Properties  Tabulated below is the table which explains MIMO parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameters:   Parameter Description MIMO Properties      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  57
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Frequency Extension  Frequency Extension is applicable only when the Channel Bandwidth is set to 40 MHz.  While choosing 40MHz bandwidth, you can select either 40 PLUS (Upper Extension  Channel) or 40 MINUS (Lower Extension Channel). 40 PLUS means the center frequency calculation is done for 20MHz and add another 20MHz to the top edge of 20MHz. 40 MINUS means the center frequency calculation is done for 20MHz and add another 20MHz to the bottom edge of 20MHz.   Guard Interval  Guard Interval determines the space between symbols being transmitted. The guard interval can be configured as either Short GI - 400n seconds or Full GI-800n seconds.   In 802.11 standards, when 40 MHz Channel Bandwidth is configured then Short GI can be used to improve the overall performance and throughout.   By default, Full GI is enabled for 5 MHz, 10 MHz and 20 MHz channels.    : Short GI-400 nSec is valid only for 40 MHz channel bandwidth.    Data Streams  MIMO radio uses multiple antennas for transmitting and receiving the data.  The data streams supported by the device are as follows:  •  Single: In single data stream, the data frames are transmitted in parallel over all the    antennas. This stream is recommended for longer range.  •  Dual: In dual data stream, the data frames are distributed across the antennas and    transmitted. This stream is recommended for higher throughput.   : Data streams is not applicable when DDRS is enabled.    Antenna Status  Tx Antenna Status  Allows the user to select the antenna(s) for data transmission. Select the checkbox against each antenna(s) for data transmission and click Ok.  : Atleast two Tx antenna ports should be enabled when Data Stream is dual, or DDRS Stream Mode is set to auto or dual. Rx Antennas Status  Allows the user to select the antenna(s) for receiving data. Select the checkbox against each antenna(s) for receiving data and click Ok.  : Atleast two Rx antenna ports should be enabled when Data Stream is dual, or DDRS Stream Mode is set to auto or dual.   : Modifying the Guard Interval and Data Stream configuration values, will reset the Tx Rate to default value.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  58
    Advanced Configuration    After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.  Reboot the device, if you have changed any of the MIMO parameters with asterisk (*) symbol marked against them.  5.4.4 Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS)  The Tsunami® products support Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for FCC, IC, and ETSI regulatory domains per FCC Part 15 Rules for U-NII devices, IC RSS-210, and ETSI EN 301-893 regulations, respectively. These rules and regulations require that the devices operating in the 5 GHz band must use DFS to prevent interference with RADAR systems.   : DFS is not applicable in case of Tsunami® MP-8160-BSU, Tsunami® MP-8160-SUA and Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE devices.   5.4.4.1 DFS in BSU or End Point A mode  Explained below is the DFS functionality and the way it operates on a BSU or in End Point A devices.  1.  Based on the selected frequency (regulatory) domain, DFS is automatically enabled on the device.  2.  During bootup,  •   if ACS is disabled on the device, the device chooses the Preferred Channel to be the operational channel.    : By default, Automatic Channel Selection (ACS) is disabled on the BSU or a device in End Point A mode.  •  if ACS is enabled, then the device scans all the channels and selects the channel with the best RSSI to be the operational channel. 3.  Once the operating channel is selected, the device scans the channel for the presence of the RADAR for a duration of    the configured Channel Wait Time (by default configured to 60 seconds). During this time, no transmission of data   occurs.  4.  If no RADAR is detected, the device starts operating in that channel.  5.  If RADAR is detected, the channel is blacklisted for 30 minutes. Now, ACS will scan all the non-blacklisted channels    and select the channel with best RSSI. Upon choosing the best channel, the device again scans the selected channel   for the presence of the RADAR for a duration of the configured Channel Wait Time. Again, during this time no   transmission of data occurs.  6.  If no RADAR is detected, it operates in that channel else repeats step 5.  7.  While operating in a channel, the device continuously monitors for potential interference from a RADAR source (this is    referred to as in-service monitoring). If RADAR is detected, then the device stops transmitting in that channel. The    channel is added to the blacklisted channel list.  8.  A channel in the blacklisted listed can be purged once the Non Occupancy Period (NOP) has elapsed for that channel.    :  • When a channel is blacklisted, all its sub-channels that are part of the current channel bandwidth are also blacklisted.  • For Europe 5.8 GHz channel, once the device finds a RADAR free channel (after 60 seconds RADAR scan), it does not perform scan for the next 24 hours. This is not applicable when device is rebooted or a particular channel got blacklisted earlier.  • Even if the preferred channel is configured with a DFS channel manually, the SU will scan for the BSU/End PointA's channel and associates automatically.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  59
    Advanced Configuration    5.4.4.2 DFS in SU or End Point B Mode  Explained below is the DFS functionality and the way it operates on SU or End Point B.  1.  When SU/End Point B has no WORP link, it scans continuously all the channels in the configured Frequency Domain    for the presence of BSU/End Point A. If suitable BSU/End Point A is found in any scanned channel, the SU or End Point    B tries to establish WORP link.  2.  After selecting the suitable BSU/End Point A’s channel,  •   If SU/End Point B DFS is disabled, then SU/End Point B tries to connect to BSU/End Point A.  •   If SU/End Point B DFS is enabled, the SU/End Point B scans the selected channel for the presence of the RADAR for    a duration of the configured Channel Wait Time (by default configured to 60 seconds).   During this time, if the    SU/End Point B detects radar, the channel is blacklisted and it starts scanning on non-blacklisted channels for a    BSU/End Point A as given in step 1. If no radar is detected, a connection will be established.  3.  While WORP link is present, the SU/End Point B continuously monitors the current active channel for potential   interference from a RADAR source (this is referred to as in-service monitoring).  •   If RADAR is detected, the SU/End Point B sends a message to the BSU or End Point A indicating the RADAR    detection on the active channel and blacklists that channel for Non Occupancy Period (NOP). The default NOP is    30 Minutes.  •   On receiving the RADAR detection message from SU/End Point B, the BSU/ End Point A blacklists the active    channel and ACS starts scanning for an interference free channel.   : The BSU blacklist the channel only when the number of SUs reporting the RADAR equals or exceeds the configured SUs Reporting RADAR parameter.   4.  A blacklisted channel can be purged once the Non Occupancy Period (NOP) has elapsed.    :   • On the SU/End Point B, if the preferred channel is configured with a DFS channel then SU will scan all the channels even if ACS is disabled.  • When a channel is blacklisted, all its sub-channels that are part of that channel bandwidth are also blacklisted.  For detailed information on DFS enabled countries, see Frequency Domains and Channels.                              Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  60
    Advanced Configuration   To configure DFS parameters, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Wireless > Interface 1 > DFS. The Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) screen appears.                                        Figure 5-14 DFS Configuration (BSU Mode)                        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  61
    Advanced Configuration                               Figure 5-15 DFS Configuration (SU/End Point B Mode)  Tabulated below is the table which explains DFS parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Channel Wait Time  One the device selects the best channel, it scans that channel for the presence of RADAR for a period of set Channel Wait Time. The wait time can be configured in the range 0 to 3600 sec. By default, the wait time is set to 60 seconds.  SUs Reporting RADAR  Applicable only to BSU.   When a SU detects a RADAR, it reports to BSU. The BSU will take a decision on whether to blacklist this channel based on SUs Reporting RADAR parameter. If the number of SU  reporting RADAR equals or exceed the configured SUs Reporting RADAR parameter then BSU blacklists that channel. If SUs reporting the RADAR is less than this configured value then BSU continues to operate in the same channel. The range varies depending on the product license. By default, it is set to 0.  DFS Status  Applicable only to SU or End Point B devices.  A SU or End Point B devices have the option to either enable or disable DFS. By default, DFS is disabled.  After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  62
    Advanced Configuration    5.4.4.3 Blacklist Information  The blacklisted table displays all the channels that are blacklisted.   Parameter Description Channel Number  Indicates the channel that is blacklisted. Reason  Specifies the reason for blacklisting a channel.  Following are the reasons for blacklisting a channel:  1. Remote Radar: A SU/End Point B detects a RADAR and informs BSU/End Point A   accordingly.  2. Local Radar: The device detects the RADAR on its own.  3. Unusable: For bandwidths more than 5 MHz, channels that are not usable because    they fall in the frequency range of other radar/manual blacklisted channels. For    example, if channel 110 is blacklisted, then channels 108, 109, 111, 112 will    become unusable for 20 MHz bandwidth.  4. Manual: A channel is manually blacklisted by the administrator.  Time Elapsed  The time elapsed since the channel was blacklisted due to radar. When the channel is blacklisted due to the presence of a radar, it will be de-blacklisted after 30 Minutes.   This parameter is applicable for radar blacklisted channels only.   Click Refresh, to view updated/refreshed blacklisted channels.   5.4.4.4 Manual Blacklist  This tab enables you to manually blacklist a channel.  However, there are few conditions to be followed while blacklisting channels:  •  When ACS is disabled, the preferred channel and its sub-channels that are part of the current channel bandwidth cannot be manual blacklisted. •  When WORP link is UP, the active channel and its sub-channels that are part of the current channel bandwidth cannot be manual blacklisted. •   When DFS/ACS is enabled, atleast one channel and its sub-channels that are part of the current channel bandwidth    should be available for operation. That is, all channels cannot be blacklisted.  To manual blacklist channels, click Manual Blacklist under Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) screen. The following screen appears:                      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  63
    Advanced Configuration                          Figure 5-16 Manual Blacklist  Select the channels that you want to blacklist by entering the start and end channels in the Start Channel and End Channel boxes respectively.  Next, click Add. All the selected channels are added to the Blacklisted Channels table.  To remove any blacklisted channel, enter the Start and End Channel of the blacklisted channels and then click Remove  button.  To refresh channel entries, click Refresh.  5.4.5 DDRS  Dynamic Data Rate Selection (DDRS) feature adjusts the transmission data rate to an optimal value to provide the best possible throughput according to the current communication conditions and link quality.  The factors for adjusting the transmission data rate are,  1.  Remote average Signal-to-noise (SNR) ratio  2.  Number of retransmissions  DDRS can be configured separately on each device (BSU mode/ SU mode /End Point A mode/ End Point B mode).   5.4.5.1 DDRS Configuration  To configure DDRS on the device, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Wireless > Interface 1 > DDRS. The DDRS Configuration screen appears:               Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  64
    Advanced Configuration                   Figure 5-17 Basic DDRS Configuration  The DDRS Configuration is classified under two categories, namely, Basic and Advanced. Basic Configuration  Under Basic Configuration screen, you can configure the following parameters.   Parameter Description DDRS Status  Enables the user the either enable or disabled DDRS feature on the device. By default, it is enabled on the device.  Stream Mode  Select the stream mode as either Auto, Single or Dual. By default, the Auto mode is selected. Based on the selected stream modes, DDRS dynamically chooses the data rate.   •  Dual: Select Dual, for higher throughput.  •  Single: Select Single, for reliability and longer range.  •  Auto: When configured to Auto, DDRS decides on the stream modes based on the   environment conditions.   : Stream Mode is not valid in legacy mode.    Maximum Rate  Represents the maximum data rate that DDRS can dynamically choose to provide the best possible throughput. The default value depends on the channel bandwidth and the number of streams.  : A change in Frequency Domain, Channel Bandwidth, Guard Interval and Data Stream will reset maximum data rate to defaults.  After configuring the required parameters, click OK  and then COMMIT. Advanced Configuration  To view Advanced Configuration parameters, click Advanced tab in the DDRS Configuration screen. The following screen appears depending on your device:     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  65
    Advanced Configuration                            Figure 5-18 Advanced DDRS Configuration  The following table lists the Advanced Configuration parameters and their description. Note that these parameters are read-only and can be configured only through CLI or SNMP.   Parameter Description Minimum Rate and  Represents the minimum and maximum data rate between which the DDRS dynamically Maximum Rate  selects the transmission data rate. These varies depending on the configured Data Streams, Channel Bandwidth and Guard Interval. Lower SNR Correction  Represents the margin value to be added to the Minimum Required SNR, for the purpose of removing the data rate from the valid data rate table. Doing so, avoids Hysteresis in the dynamic data rate.  By default, it is configured to 10 dB. Upper SNR Correction  Represents the margin value to be added to the Minimum Required SNR, for the purpose of adding the data rate to the valid data rate table. Doing so, avoids Hysteresis in the dynamic data rate.  By default, it is set to 3 dB. Rate Increment RTX  Represents a threshold for the percentage of retransmissions, below which the rate can be Threshold  increased. By default, it is set to 25%.  : If the percentage of retransmissions is between “Rate Increment RTX Threshold” and “Rate Decrement RTX Threshold” then the current operation rate is maintained.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  66
    Advanced Configuration    Rate Decrement RTX  Represents a threshold for percentage of retransmissions, above which the rate can be Threshold  decreased. By default, it is set to 30%. Please note that if the percentage of retransmissions is between “Rate Increment RTX Threshold” and “Rate Decrement RTX Threshold” then the current operation rate is maintained. Chain Balance  In the case of MIMO, the difference in SNR between two chains must be less than or equal Threshold  to this threshold for the chains to be considered as “Balanced”. By default, it is set to 15 dB.    :   •  This parameter is applicable only for “Auto” stream mode. •  When “Auto” stream mode is configured and if chains are not balanced, then Single Stream rates are considered.  Rate Back Off Interval   The DDRS algorithm constantly attempts higher data rates, when the current rate is stable.  If not successful, it goes back to older stable rate. Before the next attempt, it waits for a  minimum duration. This duration starts with 10 seconds and increases exponentially up to  Rate Back Off Interval and remains at this value. By default, it is set to 300 seconds.   Click Local SNR-Table, to view the optimal SNR values that are exchanged with the peer for optimal throughput.                                                    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  67
    Advanced Configuration                                           Figure 5-19 An Example - SNR Information  These SNR values vary depending on your device. For device specific SNR information, see SNR Information.   5.5 Security  5.5.1 Wireless Security  The Wireless Security feature helps to configure security mechanisms to secure the communication link between a BSU and a SU, and a link between End Point A and End Point B. By default, a security profile (WORP Security) is preconfigured with the default configuration for WORP security. Altogether, device allows to create 8 security profiles as required. Even though 8 security profiles can be created, only one security profile can be active at a time. The active security profile is configured as part of the WORP property Security Profile Name. For a security profile to be active, it must be enabled. Refer to Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol (WORP) for more details.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  68
    Advanced Configuration     : Configure the same security profile on the either ends to establish a connection.   To configure the Wireless security profile, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Security > Wireless Security. The Wireless Security Configuration screen appears:            Figure 5-20 Wireless Security Configuration  Tabulated below is the table which explains Wireless Security parameters:   Parameter Description Profile Name  Specifies the security profile name. By default, it is WORP Security. Entry status  Enables a user to either Enable or Disable the security profile on the device.By default, it is enabled.  Edit  Enables you to edit the existing security profiles. Click Edit to modify any of the security profile parameters.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.   5.5.1.1 Creating a New Security Profile  To create a new security profile, click Add in the Wireless Security Configuration screen. The following Wireless Security Add Row screen appears:                   Figure 5-21 Creating a New Security Profile       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  69
    Advanced Configuration    Tabulated below is the table which explains the method to create a new Security Profile:   Parameter Description Profile Name  A name to uniquely identify a security profile name. Encryption Type  Select encryption type as either None, WEP, TKIP or AES-CCM. 1. None - If the encryption type is selected as None, then there exist no security to the    data frames transmitted over the wireless medium.  2. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) - Represents the WEP Encryption type, which    uses RC4 stream cipher for confidentiality and CRC-32 for integrity. The supported    key lengths for WEP are 5/13/16 ASCII Characters or 10/26/32 Hexadecimal digits.  -  Key1 / Key 2 / Key 3 / key 4: You can configure a maximum of four WEP keys.    Enter 5/13/16 ASCII Characters or 10/26/32 Hexadecimal digits for WEP keys.  -  Transmit Key: Select one out of the four keys described above as the default    transmit key, which is used for encrypting and transmitting the data.  3. TKIP - Represents the TKIP Encryption type, which uses RC4 stream cipher for  confidentiality. TKIP provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a re-keying mechanism. It uses 128-bit keys for encryption. The key length for TKIP is 16 ASCII characters or 32 Hexadecimal digits.  -  Key1 / Key 2 / Key 3 / key 4: You can configure a maximum of four TKIP keys.    Enter 16 ASCII Characters or 32 Hexadecimal digits.  -  Transmit Key: Select one out of the four keys described above as the default    transmit key, which is used for encrypting and transmitting the data.  4. AES-CCM - Represents CCM Protocol with AES Cipher restricted to 128 bits.  •  Key: Enter 16 ASCII Characters or 32 Hex Digits for AES-CCM encryption keys. Entry status  Enables a user to either Enable or Disable the security profile on the device. By default, it is enabled.  Network Secret   Enter the WORP Protocol Secret Key, ranging from 6 to 32 characters, used for  authenticating a SU with a BSU, and an End Point B with End Point A. The network secret should be same for a BSU and SU. Similarly, the network secret should be same for an End Point A and an End Point B.   :   •  A maximum of 8 security profiles can be created. •  A Quick Bridge support AES-CCM encryption type only. •  Special characters like - = \ " ' ? / space are not allowed while configuring the keys. •  All four Keys (Key1, Key2, Key3, Key4) must be of same length and same type, that is, all four Keys must be either ASCII Characters or Hexadecimal digits. •  Transmit Key can be any one of the four keys, provided all the four keys are same in a SU and BSU, or End Point devices. •  WEP and TKIP Encryption Types are supported only in legacy Modes. •  The encryption mode should not be selected as AES-CCM while the device is interoperating with legacy Tsunami® MP.11 family devices which include 954-R, 2454-R, 4954-R, 5054-Series, and 5012-Series.  After configuring the required parameters, click Add and then COMMIT.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  70
    Advanced Configuration    Sample Security Profile Configuration   End Point A  End Point B Profile Name  WORP Security  WORP Security Encryption Type  AES-CCM AES-CCM Key  1234567890abcdef1234567890abcdef 1234567890abcdef1234567890abcdef (32 Hexadecimal digits)  (32 Hexadecimal digits) or or publicpublic1234 publicpublic1234 (16 ASCII Characters)  (16 ASCII Characters) Entry Status  Enable Enable Network Secret  public public  5.5.1.2 Editing an existing Security Profile To edit the parameters of the existing security profiles, click Edit  icon in the Wireless Security Configuration screen. The Wireless Security Edit Row screen appears:                 Figure 5-22 Wireless Security Edit Row  Edit the required parameters and click OK and then COMMIT.  5.5.2 RADIUS    :Applicable only to a BSU and End Point A devices.   The RADIUS tab allows you to configure a RADIUS authentication server on a BSU/End Point A that remotely authenticates a SU or an End Point B while registering with a BSU or an End Point A respectively. These servers are also used to configure few features (VLAN and QoS) on a SU.  A RADIUS server profile consists of a Primary and a Secondary RADIUS server that can act as Authentication servers. Configuration of Secondary Authentication Server is optional. The RADIUS server is applicable only when it is enabled in the WORP Configuration page.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  71
    Advanced Configuration   To configure the RADIUS Server profile, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Security > RADIUS. The following RADIUS Server Profile screen appears:                      Figure 5-23 Configuring RADIUS Server Profile  Tabulated below is the table which explains RADIUS Server parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Profile Name  A name that represents the Radius Server profile. By default, it is Default Radius. Max Retransmissions  Represents the maximum number of times an authentication request may be retransmitted to the configured RADIUS server. The range is 0 to 3. By default, it is set to 3. Message Response  Represents the response time (in seconds) for which that the BSU/End Point A should wait Time  for the RADIUS server to respond to a request. The range is 3 to 9 seconds. By default, it is set to 3 seconds. Re Authentication  Represents the time period after which the RADIUS server should re-authenticate a SU or Period  an End Point B. The re-authenticate period ranges from 900 to 65535 seconds. By default, the re-authentication period is set to 0.  Entry status  A read-only parameter which displays the status of the RADIUS server profile as Enabled. The Entry status cannot be disabled or edited.  Server Type  For better accessibility and reliability, you can configure two RADIUS servers: 1.  Primary RADIUS Server  2.  Secondary RADIUS Server   The secondary RADIUS server serves as backup when the primary RADIUS server is down or not reachable.  IP Address  Represents the IP address of the primary and secondary RADIUS servers.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  72
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Server Port  Specifies the port number that is used by the BSU/End Point A and the RADIUS server to communicate. By default, RADIUS Authentication Server communicates on port 1812.  Shared Secret  Specifies the password shared by the BSU/End Point A and the RADIUS server to communicate. The default password is public.   Care should be taken to configure same Shared Secret on both BSU/End Point A and  RADIUS Server, otherwise no communication is possible between BSU/End Point A and RADIUS server.  Entry Status  You can either enable or disable the configured RADIUS servers. By default, the Primary RADIUS server is enabled and the secondary RADIUS server is disabled.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.  Listed below are the points to be noted before configuring the Radius Server Profile,  1.  Message Response Time should always be less than WORP Registration Timeout.  2.  If Max Retransmissions is configured as Zero, then retransmissions does not occur.  3.  The  value  of  Max  Retransmissions  multiplied  by  Message  Response  Time  should  be  less  than  WORP   Registration Timeout value.  5.5.3 MAC ACL    :Applicable only to a BSU and End Point A mode.   The MAC ACL feature allows only the authenticated SUs/End Point Bs to access the wireless network. Please note that MAC Authentication is supported only on the wireless interface. The MAC ACL feature is applicable only when it is enabled in the WORP Configuration page.  To configure the MAC Access Control List, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Security > MAC ACL. The MAC Access Control screen appears:                Figure 5-24 MAC Access Control Configuration  Select the Operation Type as either Allow or Deny.  •   Allow: Allows only the SUs/End Point Bs configured in the MAC Access Control Table to access the wireless network.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  73
    Advanced Configuration    •  Deny: Does not allow the SUs/End Point B devices configured in the MAC Access Control Table to access the wireless network. Click OK, if you have changed the Operation Type parameters.   5.5.3.1 Add SUs/End Point B to MAC Access Control Table  To add entries to MAC Access Control table, click Add in the MAC Access Control screen. The MAC ACL Add Row screen  appears:             Figure 5-25 MAC ACL Add Row  1.  Type the MAC Address of the SU/End Point B.  2.  Add comments, if any.  3.  Select the Entry Status as either Enable or Disable.  4.  Next, click Add.    :   • The maximum number of SUs/End Point Bs that can be added to the MAC ACL table is 250.  • Either RADIUS MAC or Local MAC can be enabled at one time.   5.5.3.2 Edit the existing SUs/End Point B from MAC Access Control Table  To edit the existing SUs/End Point B from MAC Access Control Table, edit parameters from the MAC Access Control Table in MAC Access Control screen and click OK.   5.6 Quality of Service (QoS)  The Quality of Service (QoS) feature is based on the 802.16 standard and defines the classes, service flows, and packet identification rules for specific types of traffic. The main priority of QoS is to guarantee a reliable and adequate transmission quality for all types of traffic under conditions of high congestion and bandwidth over-subscription.  There are already several pre-defined QoS classes, SFCs and PIRs available that you may choose from which cover the most common types of traffic. If you want to configure something else, you start building the hierarchy of a QoS class by defining PIRs; you define the QoS class by associating those PIRs to relevant SFCs with priorities to each PIR within each SFC. Qos can be applied on standard 802.3 ethernet frames as well as PPPoE encapsulated frames.  5.6.1 QoS Concepts and Definitions  QoS feature is applicable for BSU or End Point A only. You may define different classes of service on a BSU or End Point A that  can then be assigned to the SU or End Point B that is associated, or that may get associated, with that BSU or End Point A.  You can create, edit, and delete classes of service that are specified below in the following hierarchy of parameters:    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  74
    Advanced Configuration    •  Packet Identification Rule (PIR) - up to 64 rules, including 18 predefined rules •  Service Flow class (SFC) - up to 32 SFCs, including 8 predefined SFCs; up to 8 PIRs may be associated per SFC •  Class List - Priority for each rule within each SF class - 0 to 255, with 0 being lowest priority •  QoS class - up to 8 QoS classes, including 5 predefined classes; up to 8 SFCs may be associated per QoS class  5.6.1.1 Packet Identification Rule (PIR)  A Packet Identification Rule is a combination of parameters that specifies what type of traffic is allowed or not allowed. You can create a maximum of 64 different PIRs, including 18 predefined PIRs. Also, you can create, edit, and delete PIRs that contain none, one, or more of the following classification fields:  • Rule Name •  IP ToS (Layer 3 QoS identification) •  802.1p tag (layer 2 QoS identification) •  IP Protocol List containing up to 4 IP protocols • VLAN ID • PPPoE Encapsulation •  Ether Type (Ethernet Protocol identification) •  Up to 4 TCP/UDP Source port ranges •  Up to 4 TCP/UDP Destination port ranges •  Up to 4 pairs of Source IP address + Mask •  Up to 4 pairs of Destination IP address + Mask •  Up to 4 source MAC addresses + Mask •  Up to 4 destination MAC addresses + Mask  : IP Address, TCP/UDP Port, MAC Address need to be configured separately and associate those classification in PIR details if required.   A good example is provided by the 18 predefined PIRs. Note that these rules help identify specific traffic types:  1.  All - No classification fields, all traffic matches  2.  L2 Multicast  a.  Ethernet Destination (dest = 0x010000000000, mask = 0x010000000000)  3.  L2 Broadcast  a.  Ethernet Destination (dest = 0xffffffffffff, mask = 0xffffffffffff)  4.  Cisco VoIP UL  a.  TCP/UDP Source Port Range (16,000-33,000)  b.  IP Protocol List (17 = UDP)  5.  Vonage VoIP UL  a.  TCP/UDP Source Port Range (5060-5061, 10000-20000)  b.  IP Protocol List (17 = UDP)  6.  Cisco VoIP DL  a.  TCP/UDP Destination Port Range (16,000-33,000)  b.  IP Protocol List (17 = UDP)  7.  Vonage VoIP DL  a.  TCP/UDP Destination Port Range (5060-5061, 10000-20000)    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  75
    Advanced Configuration    b.  IP Protocol List (17 = UDP)  8. TCP a.  IP Protocol List (6)  9. UDP a.  IP Protocol List (17)  10. PPPoE Control  a.  Ether Type Rule (Ether Type = DIX-Snap, Ether Value = 0x8863)  11. PPPoE Data  a.  Ether Type Rule (Ether Type = DIX-Snap, Ether Value = 0x8864)  12. IP  a.  Ether Type Rule (Ether Type = DIX-Snap, Ether Value = 0x0800)  13. ARP  a.   Ether Type Rule (Ether Type = DIX-Snap, Ether Value = 0x0806)  14. Expedited Forwarding  a.  IP TOS/DSCP (ToS low=45(0x2D), ToS high=45(0x2D), ToS mask = 63(0x3F))  15. Streaming Video (IP/TV)  a.  IP TOS/DSCP (ToS low=13(0x0D), ToS high=13(0x0D), ToS mask = 63(0x3F)) 16. 802.1p BE a.  Ethernet Priority (low=0, high=0) (this is the equivalent of the User Priority value in the TCI (Tag Control    Information) field of a VLAN tag)  17.  802.1p Voice  a.  Ethernet Priority (ToS low=6, ToS high=6) (this is the equivalent of the User Priority value in the TCI (Tag Control    Information) field of a VLAN tag)  18.  802.1p Video  a.  Ethernet Priority (ToS low=5, ToS high=5) (this is the equivalent of the User Priority value in the TCI (Tag Control    Information) field of a VLAN tag)   : Two different VoIP rule names have been defined for each direction of traffic, Uplink (UL) and Downlink (DL), (index  numbers 4 to 7). This has been done to distinguish the proprietary nature of the Cisco VoIP implementation as  opposed to the more standard Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) signaling found, for example, in the Vonage-type VoIP  service.   5.6.1.2 Service Flow Class (SFC)  A Service Flow class defines a set of parameters that determines how a stream of application data that matches a certain classification profile will be handled. You can create up to 32 different SFCs, including 8 predefined SFCs. Also, you can create, edit, and delete SFCs that contain the following parameters and values:  • Service flow name •  Scheduling type - Best Effort (BE); Real-Time Polling Service (RTPS) •  Service Flow Direction - Downlink (DL: traffic from End Point ABSU to End Point BSU); Uplink (UL: traffic from SU/End Point B to BSU/End Point A) •  Maximum sustained data rate (or Maximum Information Rate (MIR) - specified in units of 1 Kbps from 8 Kbps up to the maximum rate specified in the license. •  Minimum reserved traffic rate (or Committed Information Rate (CIR) - specified in units of 1 Kbps from 0 Kbps up to the maximum rate specified in the license. •  Maximum Latency - specified in increments of 1 ms steps from a minimum of 5 ms up to a maximum of 100 ms  Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  76
    Advanced Configuration    •  Tolerable Jitter - specified in increments of 1 ms steps from a minimum of 0 ms up to the Maximum Latency (in ms) •  Traffic priority - zero (0) to seven (7), 0 being the lowest, 7 being the highest •  Maximum number of data messages in a burst - one (1) to sixteen (16), which affects the percentage of the maximum throughput of the system •  Entry Status - Enable, Disable, and Delete   : Note that traffic priority refers to the prioritization of this specific Service Flow.   The device tries to deliver the packets within the specified latency and jitter requirements, relative to the moment of receiving the packets in the device. For delay-sensitive traffic, the jitter must be equal to or less than the latency. A packet is buffered until an interval of time equal to the difference between Latency and jitter (Latency - Jitter) has elapsed. The device will attempt to deliver the packet within a time window starting at (Latency - Jitter) until the maximum Latency time is reached. If the SFC’s scheduling type is real-time polling (RTPS), and the packet is not delivered by that time, it will be discarded. This can lead to loss of packets without reaching the maximum throughput of the wireless link. For example, when the packets arrive in bursts on the Ethernet interface and the wireless interface is momentarily maxed out, then the packets at the “end” of the burst may be timed out before they can be sent.  Users can set up their own traffic characteristics (MIR, CIR, latency, jitter, etc.) per service flow class to meet their unique requirements. A good example is provided by the 8 predefined SFCs:  1. UL-Unlimited BE a.  Scheduling Type = Best Effort b.  Service Flow Direction = Uplink c.  Entry Status = Enable d.  Maximum Sustained Data Rate = 102400 Mbps e.    Traffic Priority = 0 2.  DL-Unlimited BE (same as UL-Unlimited BE, except Service Flow Direction = Downlink) 3.  DL-L2 Broadcast BE (same as UL-Unlimited BE, except Service Flow Direction = Downlink) 4.  UL-G711 20 ms VoIP RTPS a.  Schedule type = RTPS (Real time Polling Service)  b.  Service Flow Direction = Uplink  c.  Entry Status = Enable  d.  Maximum Sustained Data Rate = 88 Kbps  e.  Minimum Reserved Traffic Rate = 88 Kbps  f.  Maximum Latency = 20 milliseconds g.    Traffic Priority = 1  5.  DL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS (same as UL-G711 20ms VoIP rtPS, except Service Flow Direction = Downlink) 6.  UL-G729 20 ms VoIP rtPS (same as UL-G711 20ms VoIP rtPS, except Maximum Sustained Data Rate and Committed Information rate = 66 Kbps) 7.  DL-G729 20 ms VoIP rtPS (same as UL-G729 20ms VoIP rtPS, except Service Flow Direction = Downlink) 8. DL-2Mbps Video a.  Schedule type = Real time Polling  b.  Service Flow Direction = Downlink  c.   Initialization State = Active  d.  Maximum Sustained Data Rate = 2 Mbps  e.  Minimum Reserved Traffic Rate = 2 Mbps  f.  Maximum Latency = 20 milliseconds g.  Traffic Priority = 1    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  77
    Advanced Configuration   Note that two different VoIP Service Flow classes for each direction of traffic have been defined (index numbers 4 to 7) which follow the ITU-T standard nomenclatures: G.711 refers to a type of audio companding and encoding that produces a 64 Kbps bitstream, suitable for all types of audio signals. G.729 is appropriate for voice and VoIP applications, but cannot transport music or fax tones reliably. This type of companding and encoding produces a bitstream between 6.4 and 11.8 Kbps (typically 8 Kbps) according to the quality of voice transport that is desired.   5.6.1.3 QoS Class  A QoS class is defined by a set of parameters that includes the PIRs and SFCs that were previously configured. You can create up to eight different QoS classes, including five predefined QoS classes. Up to eight SF classes can be associated to each QoS class, and up to eight PIRs can be associated to each SF class. For example, a QoS class called “G711 VoIP” may include the following SFCs: “UL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS” and “DL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS”.  In turn, the SFC named “UL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS” may include the following rules: “Cisco VoIP UL” and “Vonage VoIP UL”. You can create, edit, and delete QoS classes that contain the following parameters:  •  QoS class name •  Service Flow (SF) class name list per QoS class (up to eight SF classes can be associated to each QoS class) •  Packet Identification Rule (PIR) list per SF class (up to eight PIRs can be associated to each SF class) •   Priority per rule which defines the order of execution of PIRs during packet identification process. The PIR priority is a    number in the range 0-255, with priority 255 being executed first, and priority 0 being executed last. The PIR priority    is defined within a QoS class and can be different for the same PIR in some other QoS class. If all PIRs within one QoS    class have the same priority, the order of execution of PIR rules will be defined by the order of definition of SFCs, and    by the order of definition of PIRs in each SFC, within that QoS class.  A good example of this hierarchy is provided by the five predefined QoS classes: 1.  Unlimited Best Effort a.  SF class: UL-Unlimited BE  - PIR: All; PIR Priority: 0  b.  SF class: DL-Unlimited BE  - PIR: All; PIR Priority: 0  2. L2 Broadcast Best Effort  a.  SF class: DL-L2 Broadcast BE  - PIR: L2 Broadcast; PIR Priority: 0  3. G711 VoIP a.  SF class: UL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS  - PIR: Vonage VoIP UL; PIR Priority: 1  - PIR: Cisco VoIP UL; PIR Priority: 1  b.  SF class: DL-G711 20 ms VoIP rtPS  - PIR: Vonage VoIP DL; PIR Priority: 1  - PIR: Cisco VoIP DL; PIR Priority: 1  4. G729 VoIP a.  SF class: UL-G729 20 ms VoIP rtPS  - PIR: Vonage VoIP UL; PIR Priority: 1  - PIR: Cisco VoIP UL; PIR Priority: 1  b.  SF class: DL-G729 20 ms VoIP rtPS  - PIR: Vonage VoIP DL; PIR Priority: 1  - PIR: Cisco VoIP DL; PIR Priority: 1  5. 2Mbps Video  Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  78
    Advanced Configuration    a.  SF class: DL-2Mbps Video  - PIR: Streaming Video (IP/TV); PIR Priority: 1  5.6.2 QoS Configuration  There are several pre-defined QoS classes, SFCs, and PIRs available that cover the most common types of traffic. If you want to configure something else, build the hierarchy of a QoS class as follows:  1.  Define PIR MAC Address, IP Address and TCP/UDP Port Entries.  2.  Define PIRs and specify packet classification rules, associate MAC Address/IP Address/TCP-UDP Port Entries if required.  3.  Define SFCs  4.  Define QoS Class by associating PIRs with relevant SFC.  5.  Assign priorities to each PIR within each SFC.  For detailed instructions on configuring a management station (a single station used for managing an entire network), refer to QoS Configuration for a Management Station.  QoS PIR MAC Address Configuration  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List > MAC Address Entries, the QoS PIR MAC Address   Entries screen appears:  2.  Three predefined MAC Address entries are displayed in this page. You can configure a maximum of 256 entries. MAC    Address and Mask combination should be unique. This MAC Address entry can be referred in the PIR Rule’s Source or    Destination MAC Address Classification. MAC Entry referred by any PIR rule cannot be deleted.                  Figure 5-26 QoS PIR MAC Address Entries  3.  Click OK.  To Add a New PIR MAC Address Entry,  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List > MAC Address Entries, the QoS PIR MAC Address   Entries screen appears.  b.  Click Add on the QoS PIR MAC Address Entries screen to add a new entry. The following screen appears for    configuring the MAC Entry Details.            Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  79
    Advanced Configuration              Figure 5-27 QoS PIR MAC Address Add Entry  c.  Provide the MAC Address, Mask, Comment, Entry Status details and click Add. Comment field can be used to identify    when this particular entry is referred in PIR Rule/QoS Class.  The bit that is enabled in the “MAC Mask” configuration, the corresponding bit’s value in the “MAC Address” configuration  should match with the same bit of the incoming traffic’s MAC Address (other bits of the incoming traffic are ignored). Then it  is considered as matching traffic and the rest are unmatched traffic. The following is explained with the help of an example:  1.  Creating Matching profile for single MAC address  To apply QoS classification for traffic which is originated / destined from / to a Device only. MAC Address: 00:20:A6:00:00:01  MAC Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF  In this example, all bits in the MAC Mask are enabled, so incoming traffic’s MAC address should exactly match with  specified configured MAC Address (that is, 00:20:A6:00:00:01). Other traffics are considered as non-matching traffic.  2.  Creating Matching profile for all MAC Address  MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00  MAC Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00  In this example, all bits in the MAC Mask are disabled, so any traffic is considered as matching traffic.  3.  Creating Matching Profile for Broadcast MAC Address  MAC Address: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF  MAC Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF  4.  Creating Matching Profile for all Multicast MAC Address  MAC Address: 01:00:00:00:00:00  MAC Mask: 01:00:00:00:00:00  5.  Creating Matching Profile for range of MAC Address (00:20:A6:00:00:01 to 00:20:A6:00:00:FF)  MAC Address: 00:20:A6:00:00:00  MAC Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:00  QoS PIR IP Address Configuration  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List > IP Address Entries, the QoS PIR IP Address Entries   screen appears. A single predefined IP Address entry is displayed. You can configure a maximum of 256 entries. IP    Address, Subnet Mask combination should be unique. This IP Address entry can be referred in the PIR Rule’s Source or    Destination IP Address Classification. IP Address Entry referred by any PIR rule cannot be deleted.  2.  Click OK.           Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  80
    Advanced Configuration                Figure 5-28 QoS PIR IP Address Entries  To Add a New PIR IP Address Entry,  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List > IP Address Entries. The QoS PIR IP Address   Entries screen appears  b.  Click Add on the QoS PIR IP Address Entries screen to add a new entry. The following screen appears for    configuring the IP Address Entry Details.             Figure 5-29 QoS PIR IP Address Add Entry  c.  Provide the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Comment, Entry Status details and click Add. Comment field can be used by    the user to identify when this particular entry is referred in PIR Rule or QoS Class.  QoS PIR TCP/UDP Port Configuration  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List > TCP/UDP Port Entries. The QoS PIR TCP/UDP Port   Entries screen appears. Three predefined TCP/UDP Port Entries are displayed. You can configure a maximum of 256    entries. Start Port, End Port combination should be unique. This TCP/UDP Port entry can be referred in the PIR Rule’s    Source or Destination TCP/UDP Port Classification. TCP/UDP Port Entry referred by any PIR rule can not be deleted.  2.  Click OK.                       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  81
    Advanced Configuration                   Figure 5-30 QoS PIR TCP/UDP Port Entries  To Add a New PIR TCP/UDP Port Entry,  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List > TCP/UDP Port Entries. The QoS PIR TCP/UDP   Port Entries screen appears.  b.  Click Add on the QoS PIR TCP/UDP Port Entries screen to add a new entry. The following screen appears for    configuring the IP Address entry details.             Figure 5-31 QoS PIR TCP/UDP Port Add Entry  c.  Provide the Start Port, End Port, Entry Status details and click Add. Comment field can be used to identify when    this particular entry is referred in PIR Rule or QoS Class.   5.6.2.1 QoS PIR Configuration  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List. The QoS PIR Entries screen appears. 18 predefined    PIR Rules are displayed in this page. You can configure a maximum of 64 entries. PIR Rule Name should be unique.    This PIR Rule can be referred in the QoS Class’s Service Flow Details. PIR rule referred by any QoS Class cannot be   deleted.  2.  Click OK.                 Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  82
    Advanced Configuration                                          Figure 5-32 QoS PIR Entries  To Add a New PIR Rule,  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List. The QoS PIR Entries screen appears.  b.  Click Add on the QoS PIR Entries screen to add a new entry. The following screen appears for configuring the   New PIR Entry.             Figure 5-33 QoS PIR Add Entry   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  83
    Advanced Configuration    c.  Provide the PIR Name, Entry Status details and click Add.  PIR Rule Clarification Details  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List and click Details for editing a particular PIR Rule.                                                                              Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  84
    Advanced Configuration                                                           Figure 5-34 QoS PIR Edit Entry    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  85
    Advanced Configuration     Parameter Description Rule Name  This parameter specifies the Name of the Packet Identification Rule (PIR) and can have a length of 1-32 characters. ToS Rule  This parameter is used to enable or disable a TOS rule. Enter the values for the following to specify the ToS-related configuration: • ToS Low • ToS High • ToS Mask Ether Priority Rule  This parameters is used to enable or disable 802.1p priority rule. Enter the values for the following to specify 802.1p priority configuration: • Priority Low • Priority High VLAN Rule  This parameters allows to enable or disable VLAN rule. Enter the VLAN ID when the VLAN rule is enabled. PPPoE Encapsulation  This parameter is used to classify PPPoE traffic.    •   If you Enable/disable the PPPoE Configuration, it will automatically disable the    Ether Type Rule. User can configure it again by enabling Ether Type Rule.  •   When PPPoE Encapsulation is enabled, incoming packet will be checked again    Ether value “0x8864” and look for PPPoE Protocol Id value “0x0021”(IP Protocol)    by default. User can modify the PPPoE Protocol Id. All other classification rules    which are specified in the PIR rule will work only if the PPPoE Protocol Id is   “0021”.  •  Ether Value is not valid when PPPoE Encapsulation is enabled. Ether Type Rule  This parameters is used to enable or disable Ether Type rule. Enter the values for the following to specify the Ether Type rule related configuration: • Ether Type •  PPPoE Protocol Id • Ether Value  :   •  PPPoE Protocol Id is not valid if PPPoE Encapsulation is disabled. •  Ether Value is not valid if PPPoE Encapsulation is enabled.  Adding Protocol ID  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List. Click Details. The Qos PIR Edit Entry screen   appears.  b.  Navigate to Protocol Id Entries tab and then click Add to add a new Protocol entry. The following screen   appears.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  86
    Advanced Configuration               Figure 5-35 QoS PIR Protocol ID  c.  Enter the details and click Add. For deleting an entry, click Delete for the corresponding entry in PIR Details   screen.  Adding TCP/UDP Source Port Numbers  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List. Click Details. The Qos PIR Edit Entry screen   appears.  b.  Navigate to TCP/UDP Source Port Entries tab and then click Add to add a new entry. The following screen   appears.                    Figure 5-36 QoS PIR TCP/UDP Source Port Add Entry  c.  All the Entries present in the PIR TCP/UDP Port Entries are displayed in the TCP/UDP Port Entry Table. Select the    appropriate radio button and click Add. When an entry is added for the specific PIR, the entry gets displayed in    the existing TCP/UDP Port Entries table. For deleting an entry, click Delete for the corresponding entry in the PIR    Details page.  Adding TCP/UDP Destination Port Numbers  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List. Click Details. The Qos PIR Edit Entry screen   appears.  b.  Navigate to TCP/UDP Destination Port Entries tab and then click Add to add a new entry. The following screen   appears.          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  87
    Advanced Configuration                    Figure 5-37 QoS PIR TCP/UDP Destination Port Add Entry  c.  All the entries present in the PIR TCP/UDP Port Entries are displayed in the TCP/UDP Port Entry Table. Select the  appropriate radio button and click Add. When an entry is added for a specific PIR, it gets displayed in the existing  TCP/UDP Port Entries table. For deleting an entry, click Delete for the corresponding entry in the PIR Details page.  Adding Source IP Address  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List. Click Details. The Qos PIR Edit Entry screen   appears.  b.  Navigate to Source IP Address Entries tab and then click Add to add a new entry. The following screen appears:                   Figure 5-38 QoS PIR Source IP Address Add Entry  c.  All the entries present in the PIR IP Address Entries are displayed in the IP Address Entry Table. Select the  appropriate radio button and click Add. After adding the entry for this specific PIR, it is displayed in the Existing IP Address Entries table. For deleting an entry, click Delete for the corresponding entry in the PIR Details page.  Adding Destination IP Address  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR List. Click Details. The Qos PIR Edit Entry screen   appears.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  88
    Advanced Configuration   b.  Navigate to Destination IP Address Entries tab and then click Add to add a new entry. The following screen   appears.                    Figure 5-39 QoS PIR Destination IP Address Add Entry  c.  All the entries present in the PIR IP Address Entries are displayed in the IP Address Entry Table. Select the  appropriate radio button and click Add. After adding the entry for this specific PIR, it is displayed in the Existing IP Address Entries table. For deleting an entry, click Delete for the corresponding entry in the PIR Details page.  Adding Source MAC Address  a.  Click Add to add a new entry. The following screen appears.                   Figure 5-40 QoS PIR Source MAC address Add Entry  b.  All the entries present in the PIR MAC Address Entries are displayed in the MAC Address Entry Table. Select the    appropriate radio button and click Add. After adding the entry for this specific PIR, it is displayed in the Existing    MAC Address Entries table. For deleting an entry, click Delete for the corresponding entry in the PIR Details page.  Adding Destination MAC Address  a.  Click Add to add a new entry. The following screen appears.        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  89
    Advanced Configuration                    Figure 5-41 QoS PIR Destination MAC address Add Entry  b.  All the entries present in the PIR MAC Address Entries are displayed in the MAC Address Entry Table. Select the    appropriate radio button and click Add. After adding the entry for this specific PIR, it is displayed in the Existing    MAC Address Entries table. For deleting an entry, click Delete for the corresponding entry in the PIR Details page.   5.6.2.2 QoS Service Flow Configuration (SFC)  1.  Click ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > SFC List. Eight predefined SFCs are displayed in this page. This table    allows the user to configure maximum of 32 entries. Service Flow Name should be unique. This SFC can be referred in    the QoS Class’ Details. SFC referred by any QoS Class cannot be deleted.                            Figure 5-42 QoS Service Flow Entries     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  90
    Advanced Configuration    Adding a New Service Flow (SFC):  a.  Click Add to add new entry. The following screen appears for configuring the New PIR Entry.                        Figure 5-43 QoS Service Flow Add Entry  2.  Specify details for the Service Flow Name, Scheduler Type, Traffic Direction, MIR, CIR, Max Latency, Tolerable Jitter,    Traffic Priority, Max Messages in Burst and Entry Status.  3.  Click Add.   Parameter Description Service Flow Name  Specifies the Name of the Service Flow. It can be of length 1-32 characters. T  : Special characters - = \ \"\ ' ? \\ / space are not allowed.   Scheduler Type  Specifies the Scheduler methods to be used. Scheduler type supports BE (Best Effort), RTPS (Real-Time Polling Service). Traffic Direction  Specifies the Direction (Downlink or Uplink) of the traffic in which the configuration has to be matched. MIR (Maximum  Specifies the maximum bandwidth allowed for this Service Flow. This value ranges from 8 Information Rate)  kbps to maximum value specified in the license file. CIR (Committed  Specifies the reserved bandwidth allowed for this Service Flow. This value ranges from 0 to Information Rate)  maximum value specified in the license file. Max Latency  Specifies the Latency value. This value ranges from 5 to 100 ms. Tolerable Jitter  Specifies the Jitter value. This value ranges from 0 to 100 ms. Traffic Priority  Specifies the priority of the Service flow when multiple Service flows are assigned to single QoS Class. This value ranges from 0 to 7.   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  91
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Max Messages in  Specifies the maximum number of messages that can be sent in a burst. This value ranges Burst  from 1 to 16.  : Reducing the number of messages impacts the throughput.    Entry Status  Specifies the Service Flow status.  5.6.2.3 QoS Class Configuration  1.  Click ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > Class List. Five predefined QoS Classes are displayed in this page.    You can configure maximum 8 entries. QoS Class Name should be unique. This QoS Class can be referred in the    Default QoS Class or L2 Broadcast QoS Class. Any QoS Class referred cannot be deleted.  2.  Click OK.                           Figure 5-44 QoS Class Details   Parameter Description Default QoS Class  This parameter specifies the QoS Class profile that needs to be associated with an SU or End Point B which is not listed in the QoS SU or End Point B List but connected. L2 Broadcast QoS  This parameter specifies WORP to use this particular class for WORP broadcast facility. Class  L2 Broadcast QoS Class is valid only for Downlink Direction. QoS Class assigned to this profile should have at least one Downlink SFC.  4.  Add a New QoS Class: a.  Click Add to add new entry. The following screen appears for configuring the New Class Entry.   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  92
    Advanced Configuration                    Figure 5-45 QoS Class Add Entry  b.  Specify the QoS Class Name, Service Flow Name PIR Rule Name Priority and Entry Status and click Add.   Parameter Description Class Name  Specifies the Name of the QoS Class. This name length can range from 1 to 32 characters.  : Special characters - = \ \"\ ' ? \\ / space are not allowed.   Service Flow Name  Specifies the Service Flow to be associated with the QoS Class. Select one of the possible SFCs that have been previously configured in the SFC List. PIR Rule Name  Specifies the PIR Rule need to be associated with this Service Flow. Select one of the possible PIRs that have been previously configured in the PIR List.  Priority  Specifies priority or order of execution of PIRs during packet identification process. The PIR priority is a number that can range from 0-255, with priority 255 being executed  first, and priority 0 being executed last. The PIR priority is defined within a QoS class, and  can be different for the same PIR in some other QoS class. If all PIRs within one QoS class  have the same priority, the order of execution of PIR rules will be defined by the order of  definition of SFCs, and by the order of definition of PIRs in each SFC, within that QoS class.  Entry Status  Specifies the status of the QoS Class as enable/disable.  Adding Service Flows in QoS Class  1.  Click on the corresponding Details of the QoS Class for adding more Service Flows. Each QoS Class can have  maximum 8 Service Flows. At least there should be one service flow per QoS Class. The following screen is displayed to configure the new SFC entry inside the QoS Class.  2.  Click OK.              Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  93
    Advanced Configuration                          Figure 5-46 QoS Class Service Flow Details  3.  Click Add. The following screen appears for association of the new SFC in this QoS Class.                Figure 5-47 QoS Class Service Flow Add Entry  4.  Specify the Service Flow Name, PIR Rule Name, Priority and Entry Status and click Add to add a new entry.  Adding PIR in QoS Class  1.  Click on the corresponding Details provided in the Service Flow of a particular QoS Class. Maximum 8 PIR rules can be    associated per SFC of an QoS Class. At least there should be one PIR per SFC of an QoS Class. The following screen    appears to associate the new PIR entry inside an SFC of an QoS Class.  2.  Click OK.              Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  94
    Advanced Configuration                            Figure 5-48 QoS Class PIR Details  3.  Click Add. The following screen appears for association of the new PIR rule in an SFC already associated in an QoS   Class.              Figure 5-49 QoS Class PIR Add Entry  4.  Specify the PIR Rule Name, Priority and Entry Status and click Add to add a new entry.   5.6.2.4 QoS SU or End Point B List Configuration  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > SU or End Point B List. By default, the table does not have any    entry. User can configure the Wireless MAC Address of the SU or End Point B here and associate the QoS Class that is    to be used for that particular SU or End Point B.              Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  95
    Advanced Configuration               Figure 5-50 QoS SU or End Point B List Entries  2.  If an SU or End Point B is not in the list and is associated, the default QoS class configuration is applied.  Adding a New SU or End Point B  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > SU or End Point B List. The QoS SU or End Point B Entries   screen appears.  2.  Click Add to add a new entry. The following QoS SU or End Point B Table Add Row screen appears.             Figure 5-51 QoS SU or End Point B Table Add Row  3.  Specify the Wireless Mac Address of the SU or End Point B, Class Name, Comment and Entry Status and click Add.    Previously defined Class Name can be viewed in the Class Name drop-down box.    :  • QoS SU Entries configuration can be done locally or through a RADIUS Server.  • Local configuration takes priority over RADIUS Based QoS configuration.  • RADIUS Configuration is applicable only when the RADIUS MAC ACL Status is enabled on the BSU.  • When the link is down, the RADIUS configuration is lost.  5.6.3  QoS Configuration for a Management Station  As stated previously, the QoS feature enables prioritization of traffic and allocation of the available bandwidth based on that  prioritization. The system is designed in such a way that higher priority traffic preempts lower priority traffic, keeping lower  priority traffic on hold until higher priority traffic finishes. This mechanism ensures that the available bandwidth is always  given first to the higher priority traffic; if all the bandwidth is not consumed, the remaining bandwidth is given to the lower  priority traffic.  If QoS is not properly configured, the system becomes difficult to access in heavily loaded networks. One of the side effects of this misconfiguration is ping time-out, which is usually interpreted as a disconnection of the pinged node. However, with the correct QoS configuration, every node in the network can be reached at any point of time.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  96
    Advanced Configuration   The following configuration instructions explain how to configure the system so that configuration parameters can always be  changed, and ping requests and responses get higher priority in order to show the actual connectivity of the pinged node.  The configuration suggested here assumes that the whole network is managed from a single work station, called the management station. This station can be connected anywhere in the network, and can be recognized by either its IP address, or by its MAC Ethernet address if the network uses DHCP.  In this configuration, any traffic coming from or going to the management station is treated as management traffic. Therefore, the management station should be used only for configuration of the Quick Bridge nodes in the network and to check connectivity of the nodes, but it should not be used for any throughput measurements.   : While this QoS configuration is used, the TCP or UDP throughput should not be measured from the management station.  Step 1: Add Packet Identification Rules  To recognize management traffic, the system needs to recognize ARP requests or responses and any traffic coming from or going to the management station.  A. Confirm the Attributes of the Existing ARP PIR  The default QoS configuration contains the PIR called “ARP,” which recognizes ARP requests or responses by the protocol  number 0x0806 in the Ethernet Type field of the Ethernet packet. Confirm that the ARP PIR parameters are correct, as  follows:  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR list.  2.  Click Details corresponding to the ARP PIR.  3.  Confirm the following attributes:  •  Rule Name: ARP • Status: Enable •  Enable Ether Type Rule: Yes (checkbox is selected) — Ether Type: DIX-Snap  — Ether Value: 08:06(hex)  B. Create New PIRs to Recognize Management Traffic  To recognize the traffic coming from or going to the management station, the system must contain two additional PIRs: one with either the destination IP address or the destination MAC address equal to the management station’s IP or MAC address, and another with either the source IP address or the source MAC address equal to the management station’s IP or MAC address. The following examples explain PIR rules based on the IP Address of the Management Station.  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR list > IP Address Entries.  2.  Click Add. The screen for adding the Management Station's IP Address appears. Enter proper IP Address, Subnet    mask as 255.255.255.255, Entry status as Enable and then click Add. This adds the Management Station’s IP details    in the IP Address Entries of the PIR List.  3.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR list.  4.  Add PIR Rule for Source IP Address.  a.  Click Add. The screen for adding the New PIR Rule appears. Enter the PIR Rule Name as “Management Station    SRC IP”, Entry status as Enable and click Add. This adds the new PIR rule in the PIR List. By default, no    classification rules are applied.  b.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR list. Click Details for “Management Station SRC IP” PIR    rule. This displays all the classification rule details for this particular rule.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  97
    Advanced Configuration   c.  Click Add that corresponds to Source IP Address Entries. This displays a screen for referring the Management    Station’s IP Address. New Entry Table displays all the IP Address Entries of the PIR List. Select the option button    corresponding to the Management Station and then click Add. This adds the IP Address of the Management    Station to the Existing Entries. Click Back and the new entry appears in the Source IP Address Entries Table.  5.  Add PIR Rule for Destination IP Address.  a.  Click Add. This displays a screen for adding the New PIR Rule. Enter the PIR Rule Name as “Management Station    DST IP”, Entry status as Enable and then click Add. This adds the new PIR rule in the PIR List. By default, no    classification rules are applied.  b.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > PIR list. Click Details corresponding to the “Management    Station DST IP” PIR rule. This displays the classification rule details for this particular rule.  c.  Click Add corresponding to Destination IP Address Entries. This displays a screen for referring the Management    Station’s IP Address. New Entry Table displays all the Entries of the IP Address Entries of the PIR List. Select the    option button corresponding to the Management Station and click Add. This adds the IP Address of the    Management Station to the Existing Entries. Click Back and the new entry appears in the Destination IP Address   Entries Table.  Step 2: Add Service Flow Classes  To handle management traffic, the system needs two Service Flow Classes: one for uplink traffic and one for downlink traffic. 1.  Configure the Downlink Service Flow. a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > SFC list.  b.  Click Add.  c.  Enter the following parameters:  •  Service Flow Name: DL-Management  •  Scheduler Type: RtPS  •  Traffic Direction: Downlink  •  MIR: 1000  •  CIR: 1000  •  Max Latency: 20  •  Tolerable Jitter: 10  •  Priority: 7  •  Max Messages in Burst: 16  •  Entry Status: Enable  d.  Click Add. The DL-Management Service Flow is added to the QoS SFC List. 2.  Configure the Uplink Service Flow. a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > SFC list.  b.  Click Add.  c.  Enter the following parameters:  •  Service Flow Name: UL-Management  •  Scheduler Type: RtPS  •  Traffic Direction: Uplink  •  MIR: 1000  •  CIR: 1000  •  Max Latency: 20  •  Tolerable Jitter: 10  •  Priority: 7     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  98
    Advanced Configuration    •  Max Messages in Burst: 16  •  Entry Status: Enable  d.  Click Add. The UL-Management SF is added to the QoS SFC List.  NOTE: The input and output bandwidth limits set on the End Point A or BSU or on the End Point B or SU are used for    limiting aggregate bandwidth used by the SU or End Point B. These limits override any limit imposed by MIR in the    SFC. Therefore, these limits should be set to at least 1000 kbps (MIR values in UL-Management and DL-Management   SFCs).  Step 3: Configure QoS Classes  Finally, the DL-Management SFC and UL-Management SFCs created in Step 2 must be added to each QoS Class used by the  Quick Bridge network. Additionally, within the QoS class, these SFC must have the three PIRs mentioned in Step 1 associated  with them.  1.  Add SFCs to QoS Class.  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > Class list.  b.  Click Details corresponding to the first class (Unlimited Best Effort) you wish to modify.  c.  Under the QoS Class Service Flow, click Add.  d.  Configure the following parameters, and click Add. This adds the New SFC & PIR relation to the QoS Class.  •  Service Flow Name: DL-Management  •  PIR Rule Name: ARP  •  PIR Priority: 63  •  Entry Status: Enable.  e.  Again click Add under the QoS Class Service Flow Details.  f.  Configure the following parameters and click Add. This adds the New SFC & PIR relation to the QoS Class. •  Service Flow Name: UL-Management •  PIR Rule Name: ARP  •  PIR Priority: 63  •  Entry Status: Enable  2.   Add PIRs to SFCs within the QoS Class.  a.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > QoS > Class list.  b.  Click Details corresponding to the first class (Unlimited Best Effort) you wish to modify.  c.  Under the QoS Class Service Flow Details, click Details corresponding to the DL-Management Service Flow.  d.  Under the QoS Class PIR Details heading, click Add.  e.  Add the Management Station DST IP PIR to this Service Flow by configuring the following parameters:  •  PIR Rule Name: Management Station DST IP  •  PIR Priority: 63  •  Entry Status: Enable  f.  Click Add. This PIR is added to the first Qos Class (Unlimited Best Effort) Service Flow’s (DL-Management) list.  g.  Add the Management Station SRC IP PIR to this Service Flow by configuring the following parameters:  •  PIR Rule Name: Management Station SRC IP  •  PIR Priority: 63  •  Entry Status: Enable  h.  Return to the Class List and repeat steps 2 - 7 for the UL-Management Service Flow in this class.        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  99
    Advanced Configuration   5.7 RADIUS Based SU QoS Configuration  RADIUS based QoS configuration enables you to configure QoS parameters on a SU through RADIUS Server. This way of  configuring QoS parameters, reduces the task of manually configuring QoS parameters on each SU available on the network.  Explained below is the process followed to configure QoS parameters on a SU from a RADIUS Server.                   Figure 5-52 RADIUS Based QoS Configuration  To establish a connection with the BSU, the SU sends a registration request to BSU. On receiving the registration request, the  BSU sends an Access request along with the SU MAC address, to the RADIUS Server. The RADIUS Server then checks the  authentication of the user. If it is an authenticated user, it sends an Access-Accept response along with Vendor assigned QoS  parameter’s value to the BSU. On receiving the response, the BSU sends the response to the SU. The received QoS parameters  are then applied on the SU.  Tabulated below are the vendor specific attributes:   Name of the attribute  Vendor  Attribute  Attribute Value Assigned Format Attribute Number QoS Class Index  34  Decimal  1 - 8 QoS Class SU Table Status  35  Decimal  1 - Enable / 2 - Disable   :   • RADIUS Based QoS configuration takes priority over Local QoS configuration.  • When the link is down, the configuration received from the RADIUS is lost.                Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  100
    Advanced Configuration   5.8 VLAN (Bridge Mode Only)  The Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) feature helps in logical grouping of network host on different physical LAN segments, which can communicate with each other as if they are all on the same physical LAN segment.  With VLANs, you can conveniently, efficiently, and easily manage your network in the following ways:  • Define groups •  Reduce broadcast and multicast traffic to unnecessary destinations - Improve network performance and reduce latency  • Increase security - Secure network restricts members to resources on their own VLAN The SUs and End Point devices support QinQ VLAN feature that enables service providers to use a single VLAN ID to support multiple customer VLANs by encapsulating the 802.1Q VLAN tag within another 802.1Q frame. The benefits with QinQ are, •  Increases the VLAN space in a provider network or enterprise backbone •  Reduce the number of VLANs that a provider needs to support within the provider network for the same number of customers •  Enables customers to plan their own VLAN IDs, without running into conflicts with service provider VLAN IDs •  Provides a simple Layer 2 VPN solution for small-sized MANs (Metropolitan Area Networks) or intranets •  Provides customer traffic isolation at Layer 2 within a service provider network   : VLAN can be configured in Bridge Mode only.    5.8.1 System-Level VLAN Configuration  To configure system-level VLAN parameters, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > VLAN. The VLAN configuration screen appears.                Figure 5-53 System-Level VLAN Configuration  1.  VLAN Status: This parameter is used to either enable or disable VLAN feature on the device. By default, this  parameter is disabled. To enable VLAN, select the VLAN Status box. If VLAN status is enabled, it indicates that locally configured VLAN parameters will be applied on the device. If VLAN status is disabled, it indicates that the device is open for remote VLAN configuration.  2.  Management VLAN Id: This parameter enables the user to configure VLAN Id for management frames (SNMP, ICMP,    Telnet and TFTP). The stations that manage the device must tag the management frames with the management VLAN    Id. By default, the Management VLAN Id is set to -1 which indicates no tag is added to the management frame. To set    VLAN tag to the management frame, enter a value ranging from 1 to 4094.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  101
    Advanced Configuration     : Before setting the Management VLAN Id, make sure that the station that manages the device is a member of the same VLAN; else, your access to the device will be lost.   3.  Management VLAN Priority: This parameter is used to set IEEE 802.1p priority for the management frames. By    default, the priority is set to 0. To set the VLAN priority, enter a value ranging from 0 to 7.  4.  Double VLAN (Q in Q) Status: Q in Q (also called as Double VLAN or Stacked VLAN) mechanism expands the VLAN    space by tagging the tagged packets, thus producing a “double-tagged” frame. The expanded VLAN space allows the    service provider to provide certain services, such as Internet access on specific VLANs for specific customers, and still    allows the service provider to provide other types of services for their other customers on other VLANs.  By default, Double VLAN is disabled on the device. To enable, select Enable from the Double VLAN (Q in Q) Status box and click OK.   :   •  If Double VLAN (Q in Q) Status is enabled, device expects Double VLAN tagged packet in DownLink  Direction. Management can be accessed with single VLAN/Double VLAN based on the management VLAN ID configured.  •  Only SU, End Point A and End Point B support Double VLAN (Q in Q) feature.  5.  Service VLAN TPID: The Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) helps to identify the frame as VLAN tagged frame. By default    the Service VLAN TPID is set to 0x8100. To interwork with few vendor devices that set the TPID to 0x9100, the device    allows the user to configure Service VLAN TPID as 0x9100. In this case, when a QinQ packet goes out of the device,    the Ether type of outer VLAN tag is changed to 0x9100.  6.  Service VLAN Id: This parameter enables the user to configure outer/service provider VLAN ID for the data frames. By    default, the Service VLAN ID is set to -1 which indicates no outer/service VLAN tag is added to the data frame. To set    VLAN tag to the frame, enter a value ranging from 1 to 4094.    : When Double VLAN is enabled on the device, the Service VLAN ID should not be set to -1.   7.  Service VLAN Priority: This parameter is used to set IEEE 802.1p priority in outer/service VLAN tag for the data    frames. By default, the priority is set to 0. To set the VLAN priority, enter a value ranging from 0 to 7.  5.8.2 Ethernet VLAN Configuration  You can configure VLAN on the ethernet interface(s) by using any one of the following VLAN Modes:  1.  Transparent Mode  2.  Access Mode  3.  Trunk Mode   5.8.2.1 Transparent Mode  Transparent mode can be configured in a BSU, SU and End Point devices. This mode is equivalent to NO VLAN support and is the default mode. It is used to connect VLAN aware or unaware networks. In this mode, the device transfers both tagged and untagged frames received on the Ethernet or WORP interface.  To configure the Ethernet interface of the device in VLAN Transparent Mode, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > VLAN > Ethernet. The VLAN Ethernet Configuration screen appears:       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  102
    Advanced Configuration                 Figure 5-54 Transparent Mode  Tabulated below is the table which explains the method to configure the device in Transparent mode:   Parameters Description Interface  Displays the name of the Ethernet interface. VLAN Mode  Select the VLAN mode as Transparent.  : When the device is configured in Double VLAN mode, do not configure the Ethernet interface of the device in Transparent Mode.   Click OK and then COMMIT.    : Wireless Interface of the device will always be in transparent mode. There is no support provided to edit the VLAN parameters of the wireless interface.   5.8.2.2 Access Mode  Access Mode can be configured in a SU, End Point A and End Point B. This mode is used to connect VLAN aware networks with VLAN unaware networks.  The ingress untagged traffic received on the Ethernet interface are tagged with the configured Access VLAN Id and Access VLAN priority before forwarding to the WORP interface. Similarly all egress tagged frames with specified VLAN Id are untagged at the Ethernet interface and then forwarded. Based on the Management VLAN ID configuration, both tagged and untagged management frames can access the device from the WORP interface. However, only untagged management frames can access the device from the Ethernet Interface; the tagged frames are dropped.  To configure the Ethernet interface of the device in Access Mode, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > VLAN > Ethernet. The VLAN Ethernet Configuration screen appears:                  Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  103
    Advanced Configuration                    Figure 5-55 Access Mode  Tabulated below is the table which explains the method to configure the device in  Access Mode:   Parameter Description Interface  Displays the name of the Ethernet interface. VLAN Mode  Select the VLAN mode as Access and click OK. Access VLAN Id  Enter the Access VLAN Id in the Access VLAN Id box. The untagged data frames received at the Ethernet interface are tagged with this configured VLAN Id and then forwarded to  the WORP interface. By default, the Access VLAN Id is set to -1 which indicates no tag is  added to the data frame. To set Access VLAN tag to the data frame, enter a value ranging  from 1 to 4094.   : When Double VLAN is enabled on the device, the Access VLAN ID should not be  set to -1.  Access VLAN Priority  This parameter is used to set IEEE 802.1p priority for the data frames. By default, the  priority is set to 0. To set the Access VLAN priority, enter a value ranging from 0 to 7.   Click OK and then COMMIT.   5.8.2.3 Trunk Mode  Trunk Mode can be configured in a BSU, SU, End Point A and End Point B. This mode is used to connect VLAN aware networks with VLAN aware networks. In the Trunk mode, the Ethernet interface of the device forwards only those tagged frames whose VLAN Id matches with a VLAN Id present in the trunk table.  If the device receives untagged frames and the Allow Untagged Frames functionality is disabled, then the untagged packets are dropped.  If the Allow Untagged Frames functionality is enabled, then functionality varies based on the device:  •  In case of a BSU, the untagged packets are forwarded to the destination. •  In case of a SU, End Point A and End Point B, the device behaves as in Access Mode for untagged traffic. The untagged frames are tagged with the configured Port VLAN ID and forwarded to the destination.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  104
    Advanced Configuration     : Mixed VLAN Mode = Trunk Mode + Allow Untagged Frames + Port VLAN ID   To configure the Ethernet interface of the device in Trunk mode, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > VLAN > Ethernet. The VLAN Ethernet Configuration screen appears:                   Figure 5-56 Trunk Mode (BSU)                        Figure 5-57 Trunk Mode (SU/End Point A/End Point B)  Tabulated below is the table which explains the method to configure the device in Trunk Mode:   Parameter Description Interface  Displays the name of the Ethernet interface. VLAN Mode  Select the VLAN Mode as Trunk.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  105
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Allow Untagged  Select Enable or Disable. By default, it is disabled. Frames  •   Disable: If this option is selected, the Ethernet interface forwards only tagged    frames whose VLAN Id matches with a VLAN ID present in trunk table.  •  Enable: - In case of a BSU, when Allow Untagged Frames is enabled, the Ethernet    interface of the device forwards the data packets as-is.  - In case of a SU/End Point A/End Point B, when Allow Untagged Frames is    enabled, the device behaves as in Access mode. Click OK.  Port VLAN ID  Enter the Port VLAN ID in the Port VLAN ID box. The untagged data frames received at the Ethernet interface are tagged with this port VLAN Id and then forwarded to the  destination interface. By default, the Port VLAN Id is set to -1 which indicates no tag is added to the data frame. To set Port VLAN tag to the data frame, enter a value ranging from 1 to 4094.   :   •  Applicable only on a SU, End Point A and End Point B. •  When Double VLAN is enabled on the device, the Port VLAN ID should not be set to -1. •  The configured Port VLAN Id should not exist in the Trunk table. Port VLAN Priority  This parameter is used to set IEEE 802.1p priority for the data frames. By default, the priority is set to 0. To set the Port VLAN priority, enter a value ranging from 0 to 7.   : Applicable only to SU and End Point devices.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT. Add VLAN IDs to Trunk Table  To add VLAN IDs to the trunk table,  1.  Click Add in the VLAN Ethernet Configuration screen. The VLAN Trunk Table Add Row screen appears.           Figure 5-58 Add VLAN IDs to Trunk Table          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  106
    Advanced Configuration    Tabulated below is the table which explains the method to add VLAN IDs to Trunk Table:   Parameter Description Trunk Id  Enter VLAN ID in the Trunk Id box. Entry Status  This parameter indicates the status of each VLAN Trunk Id entry. By default, the Trunk Id is enabled. To disable, select Disable from the Entry Status box.   2.  Click Add.  3.  To save and apply the configured parameters on the device, click COMMIT.    : You can configure a maximum of 256 trunk VLAN Ids in a BSU and End Point A device, and 16 VLAN Ids in a SU and End Point B device.   5.9 RADIUS Based SU VLAN Configuration  RADIUS based VLAN configuration enables you to configure VLAN parameters on a SU through RADIUS Server. This way of configuring VLAN parameters,  •  Reduces the task of manually configuring VLAN parameters on each SU available on the network •  Allows SU to remain on the same VLAN as it moves across the network   Explained below is the process followed to configure VLAN parameters on a SU from a RADIUS Server.                   Figure 5-59 RADIUS Based VLAN Configuration  To establish a connection with the BSU, the SU sends a registration request to BSU. On receiving the registration request, the BSU sends an Access request along with the SU MAC address, to the RADIUS Server. The RADIUS Server then checks the authentication of the user. If it is an authenticated user, it sends an Access-Accept response along with Vendor assigned VLAN parameter’s value to the BSU. On receiving the response, the BSU sends the response to the SU. The received VLAN parameters are then applied on the SU.         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  107
    Advanced Configuration    Tabulated below are the vendor specific attributes:   Name of the attribute  Vendor  Attribute  Attribute Value Assigned Format Attribute Number SU_VLAN_MAC  3  MacAddr  SU Mac Address VLAN_ETH1 Vlan Mode  4  Decimal  1 -Transparent Mode 2 - Trunk Mode / 3 - Access Mode SU_VLAN_Name 5 String SU VLAN Name VLAN_ETH1 Access VLAN ID  6  Decimal  1 - 4095 VLAN_ETH1 Access Vlan Priority  7  Decimal  0 - 7 Management VLAN ID attribute  8  Decimal  1 - 4095 Management VLAN Priority  9  Decimal  0 - 7 VLAN_ETH1 TrunkID 1 … 16  10 … 25  Decimal  1 - 4095 SU_VLAN_Table_Status  26  Decimal  1 - enable / 2 - disable / 3 - delete Service Vlan Id (Q-inQ)  32  Decimal  1 - 4095 Service Vlan Priority (Q-inQ)  33  Decimal  0 - 7 QoS Class Index  34  Decimal  1 - 8 QoS Class SU Table Status  35  Decimal  1 - Enable / 2 - Disable VLAN_ETH2 Vlan Mode  40  Decimal  1 - Transparent Mode 2 - Trunk Mode / 3 - Access Mode VLAN_ETH2 Access Vlan Id  41  Decimal  1 - 4095 VLAN_ETH2 Access Vlan Priority  42  Decimal  0 - 7 VLAN_ETH2 TrunkID 1 … 16  43 … 58  Decimal  1 - 4095 Double Vlan (Q-in-Q) Status  59  Decimal  1 - Enable / 2 - Disable Service Vlan TPID (Q-inQ)  60  Decimal  1 - InnerTag / 2 - Outer Tag VLAN_ETH1_Port_Vlan_Id  61  Decimal  1 - 4095 VLAN_ETH1_Port_Vlan_Pri  62  Decimal  0 - 7 VLAN_ETH1_Allow_Untag_Frames  63  Decimal  1 - Enable / 2 - Disable VLAN_ETH2_Port_Vlan_Id  64  Decimal  1 - 4095 VLAN_ETH2_Port_Vlan_Pri  65  Decimal  0 - 7 VLAN_ETH2_Allow_Untag_Frames  66  Decimal  1 - Enable / 2 - Disable        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  108
    Advanced Configuration     :   • RADIUS Configuration is applicable only when the VLAN Status is disabled on the SU.  • Local VLAN configuration takes priority over RADIUS Based VLAN configuration.  • When the link is down, the configuration received from the RADIUS is lost.   5.10 Filtering (Bridge Only)  Filtering is useful in controlling the amount of traffic exchanged between the wired and wireless networks. By using filtering  methods, we can restrict any unauthorized packets from accessing the network. Filtering is available only in bridge mode.  The various filtering mechanisms supported by the device are as follows:  •  Protocol Filter •  Static MAC Address Filter •  Advanced Filtering •  TCP/UDP Port Filter •  Storm Threshold Filter Filters get activated only when they are globally enabled on the device. To apply/configure global filters on the device, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Filtering. The Filtering screen appears.               Figure 5-60 Filtering  Tabulated below is the table which explains Filtering parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Global Filter Flag  By default, Global Filtering is disabled meaning which no filters are applied on the device. To apply filters on the device, enable the Global Filter Flag.  Please note that if Global Filter Flag is not enabled on the device, then none of the filters can be applied on the device.              Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  109
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description STP/LACP Frames  This parameter allows you to either Block or Passthru STP/LACP frames on the network. •  Passthru: By allowing the STP/LACP frames, any loops that occurs within a network    can be avoided. If configured to Passthru, the STP/LACP frames in the system are   bridged.  •  Block: When blocked, the STP/LACP frames encountered on a network are    terminated at bridge.  By default, STP/LACP frames are allowed on the network.   : STP or LACP Frame Status will block or passthru the frames destined to IEEE 802.1D and 802.1Q reserved MAC address (01:80:C2:00:00:00 to  01:80:C2:00:00:0F).   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.  5.10.1 Protocol Filter  The Protocol Filter blocks or forwards packets based on the protocols supported by the device.  To configure Protocol Filter on the device, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Filtering > Protocol Filter. The Protocol Filter screen appears:                                                  Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  110
    Advanced Configuration                                             Figure 5-61 Protocol Filter                       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  111
    Advanced Configuration   Tabulated below is the table which explains Protocol Filter parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Filtering Control  This parameter is used to configure the interface on which filtering has to be applied. The filtering can be applied on any of the following interfaces:  •  Ethernet: Packets are examined at the Ethernet interface.  •  Wireless: Packets are examined at the Wireless interface.  •  All Interfaces: Packets are examined at both Ethernet and Wireless interface. By default, the Filtering Control is set to Disable, meaning which Protocol Filters are disabled on all the interfaces.   : In addition to enabling Filtering Control, the Global Filter Flag should also be enabled for the filter to take effect.  Filtering Type  This parameter specifies the action to be performed on the data packets whose protocol type is not defined in the protocol filter table (this table contains a list of default protocols supported by the device and the protocols defined by the user), or whose Entry Status is in Disable state. The available filtering types are:  •  Block: The protocols with entry status Disable or the protocols which do not exist in    the protocol filtering table are blocked.  •  Passthru: The protocols with entry status Disable or the protocols which do not exist    in the protocol filtering table are allowed through the configured interface.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.   5.10.1.1 Protocol Filter Table  The Protocol Filter table displays a list of default protocols supported by the device and the protocols created by the user. By default, the system generates 19 protocols entries. Each of the Protocol contains the following information:   Parameter Description Protocol Name  Represents the Protocol name. The system throws an error when you try to edit the name of a default protocol.  Protocol Number   Represents the Protocol number. The value is of 4 digit hexadecimal format. The system  throws an error when you try to edit the Protocol number of a default protocol.  Filter Status  The supported filter status are, •  Passthru: When the filter status is set to Passthru and entry status is Enable, all    packets whose protocol matches with the given protocol number are forwarded on    the configured interface.  •  Block: When the filter status is set to Block and entry status is Enable, all packets    whose protocol matches with the given protocol number are dropped on the    configured interface.  By default, the status is set to Block.         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  112
    Advanced Configuration    Entry Status  Set the entry status as either Enable, Disable or Delete. •  Enable: Enables filter status on a protocol.  •  Disable: Disables filter status on a protocol.  •  Delete: Deletes a protocol entry from the Protocol Filter Table.    : System-defined default protocols cannot be deleted.     5.10.1.2 Add User-defined Protocols to the Filter Table  To add user-defined protocols to the Protocol Filter Table, click Add in the Protocol Filter screen. The Protocol Filter Add Row screen appears.               Figure 5-62 Add User-defined Protocols  Enter details for all the required parameters and click Add.    : The maximum number of Protocol Filters that can be added to the table are 64, out of which 19 are default entries.    5.10.2 Static MAC Address Filter  The Static MAC Address filter optimizes the performance of a wireless (and wired) network. With this feature configured, the device can block traffic between wired devices and wireless devices based on the MAC address.  Each MAC Address or Mask is comprised of 12 hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F) that correspond to a 48-bit identifier. (Each hexadecimal digit represents 4 bits (0 or 1)).  Taken together, a MAC Address/Mask pair specifies an address or a range of MAC addresses that the device will look for when examining packets. The device uses Boolean logic to perform an “AND” operation between the MAC Address and the Mask at the bit level. A Mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 corresponds to all MAC addresses, and a Mask of FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF applies only to the specified MAC Address.  For example, if the MAC Address is 00:20:A6:12:54:C3 and the Mask is FF:FF:FF:00:00:00, the device will examine the source and destination addresses of each packet looking for any MAC address starting with 00:20:A6. If the Mask is FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF, the device will only look for the specific MAC address (in this case, 00:20:A6:12:54:C3).  You can configure the Static MAC Address Filter parameters depending on the following scenarios:  •   To prevent all traffic from a specific wired MAC address from being forwarded to the wireless network, configure only    the Wired MAC Address and Wired Mask (leave the Wireless MAC Address and Wireless Mask set to all zeros).     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  113
    Advanced Configuration   •   To prevent all traffic from a specific wireless MAC address from being forwarded to the wired network, configure only    the Wireless MAC address and Wireless Mask (leave the Wired MAC Address and Wired Mask set to all zeros).  •   To prevent traffic between a specific wired MAC address and a specific wireless MAC address, configure all four    parameters. Configure the wired and wireless MAC address and set the wired and wireless mask to all Fs.  •  To prevent all traffic from a specific wired Group MAC address from being forwarded to the wireless network,   configure only the Wired MAC Address and Wired Mask (leave the Wireless MAC Address and Wireless Mask set to all   zeros).  •  To prevent all traffic from a specific wireless Group MAC address from being forwarded to the wired network, configure only the Wireless MAC address and Wireless Mask (leave the Wired MAC Address and Wired Mask set to all zeros). •   To prevent traffic between a specific wired Group MAC address and a specific wireless Group MAC address, configure    all four parameters. Configure the wired and wireless MAC address and set the wired and wireless mask to all Fs.  Static MAC Filter Examples  Consider a network that contains a wired PC and three wireless PCs. The MAC addresses for each PCs are as follows:  •  MAC Address of the wired PC: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A •  MAC Address of the wireless PC1: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4 •  MAC Address of the wireless PC2: 00:02:2D:51:32:12 •  MAC Address of the wireless PC3: 00:20:A6:12:4E:38 Prevent two specific PCs from communicating Configure the following settings to prevent the wired PC and wireless PC1 from communicating: •  Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A •  Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF •  Wireless MAC Address: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4 •  Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Result:  Traffic between the wired PC and wireless PC1 is blocked. wireless PC2 and PC3 can still communicate with the wired  PC.  Prevent multiple Wireless PCs from communicating with a single wired PC  Configure the following settings to prevent wireless PC1 and PC2 from communicating with the wired PC:  •  Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A •  Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF •  Wireless MAC Address: 00:02:2D:51:94:E4 •  Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:00:00:00 Result: When a logical “AND” is performed on the Wireless MAC Address and Wireless Mask, the result corresponds to any MAC address beginning with the 00:20:2D prefix. Since wireless PC1 and wireless PC2 share the same prefix (00:02:2D), traffic between the wired Server and wireless PC1 and PC2 is blocked. Wireless PC3 can still communicate with the wired PC since it has a different prefix (00:20:A6).  Prevent all wireless PCs from communicating with a single wired PC  Configure the following settings to prevent wired PC from communicating with all three wireless PCs:  •  Wired MAC Address: 00:40:F4:1C:DB:6A •  Wired Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF •  Wireless MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00 •  Wireless Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  114
    Advanced Configuration  Result:  The device blocks all traffic between the wired PC and all wireless PCs.  Prevent a wireless PC from communicating with the wired network  Configure the following settings to prevent wireless PC 3 from communicating with any device on the Ethernet:  •  Wired MAC Address: 00:00:00:00:00:00 •  Wired Mask: 00:00:00:00:00:00 •  Wireless MAC Address: 00:20:A6:12:4E:38 •  Wireless Mask: FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Result: The device blocks all traffic between wireless PC 3 and the Ethernet network.   5.10.2.1 Static MAC Address Filter Configuration  To configure Static MAC Filter parameters, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Filtering > Static MAC Address Filter. The Static MAC Address Filter screen appears:             Figure 5-63 Static MAC Address Filter  Click Add in the Static MAC Address Filter screen. The Static MAC Address Filter Add Row screen appears.                 Figure 5-64 Static MAC Address Filter Add Row               Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  115
    Advanced Configuration   Tabulated below is the table which explains Static MAC Address Filter parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Wired MAC Address  Specifies the MAC address of the device on the wired network that is restricted from communicating with a device in the wireless network. Wired MAC Mask  Specifies the range of MAC address to which this filter is to be applied. Wireless MAC address  Specifies the MAC address of the device on the wireless network that is restricted from communicating with a device in the wired network. Wireless MAC Mask  Specifies the range of MAC address to which this filter is to be applied. Comment  Specifies the comment associated with Static MAC Filter table entry. Status  Specifies the status of the newly created filter.  Click Add and then COMMIT.    :  •  A maximum of 200 MAC address filters can be added. •  The Wired MAC address and the Wireless MAC address should be a unicast MAC address. •  The MAC Address or Mask includes 12 hexadecimal digits (each hexadecimal equals to 4 bits containing 0 or 1) which is equivalent to 48 bit identifier. 5.10.3 Advanced Filtering  With Advanced Filtering, you can filter pre-defined IP Protocol traffic on the network.  By default, 5 IP protocols are pre-defined and based on the configuration they can be blocked or allowed to enter the  network.  To apply filters on the IP protocols, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Filtering > Advanced Filtering. The Advanced Filtering screen appears:                  Figure 5-65 Advanced Filtering       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  116
    Advanced Configuration   The Advanced Filtering table contains a list of 5 pre-defined protocols on which Advanced Filtering is applied. The following table explains the Filtering table parameters:   Parameter Description Protocol Name  Represent the protocol name. By default, Advanced Filtering is supported on the following 5 default protocols:  •  Deny IPX RIP  •  Deny IPX SAP  •  Deny IPX LSP  •  Deny IP Broadcasts  •  Deny IP Multicasts  Direction  Represents the direction of an IP Protocol traffic that needs to be filtered. The directions that can be filtered are,  •  Ethernet to wireless  •  Wireless to ethernet  •  Both  Entry Status  If enabled, then filtering is applied on the IP protocol else not applied.   :   • The Advanced Filtering table contains a maximum of 5 pre-defined IP protocols.  • User-defined IP protocols cannot be added to the Advanced Filtering table.   5.10.3.1 Edit Advanced Filtering Table Entries  To edit Advanced Filtering table protocols, click Edit in the Advanced Filtering screen. The Advanced Filtering - Edit Entries screen appears.                                  Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  117
    Advanced Configuration                             Figure 5-66 Advance Filtering- Edit Entries  Modify the IP protocol traffic direction that needs to be filtered, and the filtering status for the desired IP Protocol. Next click OK and then COMMIT.  5.10.4 TCP/UDP Port Filter  TCP/UDP Port Filtering allows you to enable or disable Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) ports and User Datagram Port (UDP) ports on network devices. A user specifies a Protocol Name, Port Number, Port Type (TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP), and filtering interfaces (Only Wireless, Only Ethernet or Both) in order to block access to services such as Telnet and FTP, and traffic such as NETBIOS and HTTP.  To apply filters on TCP/UDP Port, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Filtering > TCP/UDP Port Filter. The TCP/UDP Port Filter screen appears.                           Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  118
    Advanced Configuration                           Figure 5-67 TCP/UDP Port Filter  The Filter Control parameters determines if filter has to be applied or not on a TCP/UDP Port. By default, it is disabled. To apply filters, select Enable and click OK.   5.10.4.1 TCP/UDP Port Filter Table  The TCP/UDP Port Filter table displays a list of default TCP/UDP ports and user-defined ports which can be enabled or disabled as desired. By default, the device support 7 default TCP/UDP port filter entries.   Parameter Description Protocol Name  The name of the service/protocol. Please note that the system throws an error when an attempt is made to edit the default service/protocol name. Port Number  Represents the destination port number. Please note that the system throws an error when an attempt is made to edit the port number. Port Type  Represents the port type (TCP, UDP, Both). Filter Interface  Represents the interface on which the filter is applied. The supported interfaces are, •  Only Ethernet  •  Only Wireless  •  All Interfaces  Entry Status  Set the entry status as either Enable, Disable or Delete. •  Enable: Filter is applied and filters the packet based on the Port number and port   type.  •  Disable: No filter is applied.  •  Delete: Allows to delete only user-defined TCP/UDP port filter entry. When you    attempt to delete default entries, the device throws an error.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  119
    Advanced Configuration    If you have configured any user-defined protocols then click OK and then COMMIT.  For example, a device with the following configuration would discard frames received on its Ethernet interface with a UDP destination port number of 137, effectively blocking NETBIOS Name Service packets. Please note that even the Filtering Control should be enabled to apply the filter.  Protocol Name  Port Number  Port Type  Filter Interface  Entry Status (Enable/Disable) NETBIOS Name Service 137 UDP Ethernet Enable  5.10.4.2 Adding User-defined TCP/UDP Port Filter Entries  To add user-defined TCP/UDP port filter entries to the table, click Add in the TCP / UDP Port Filter screen. The TCP/UDP Port Filter Add Row screen appears:                Figure 5-68 Add User-defined TCP/UDP Protocols  Provide details for all the parameters and click Add.  To apply the configured parameters, click COMMIT.    :  • The TCP/UDP filtering operation is allowed only when the Global Flag and Filter Control options are enabled.  • A maximum of 64 TCP/UDP Port Filter entries can be added to the table, out of which 7 are default entries.   5.10.5 Storm Threshold Filter  The Storm Threshold Filter restricts the excessive inbound multicast or broadcast traffic on layer two interfaces. This protects against broadcast storms resulting from spanning tree misconfiguration. A broadcast or multicast filtering mechanism needs to be enabled so that a large percentage of the wireless link remains available to the connected mobile terminals.  To configure Storm Threshold Filter, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Filtering > Storm Threshold Filter. The Storm Threshold Filter screen appears. This screen contains information about the threshold values per second of the multicast and broadcast packets that can be processed for the interface(s) present in the device.                 Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  120
    Advanced Configuration                Figure 5-69 Storm Threshold Filter  Tabulated below is the table which explains Storm Threshold Filter parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Interface  Allows to configure the type of interface on which filtering has to be applied. The Storm Threshold filter can be used to filter the traffic on two types of interfaces: Ethernet or  Wireless. By default, Storm Threshold filtering is disabled on both Ethernet and Wireless  interfaces.  Multicast Threshold   Allows to configure the threshold value of the multicast packets to be processed for the  Ethernet or Wireless interface. Packets more than threshold value are dropped. If threshold value for multicast packets is set to '0', filtering is disabled. The default Multicast  Threshold value is 0 per second.  Broadcast Threshold   Allows to configure the threshold value of the broadcast packets to be processed for the  Ethernet or Wireless interface. Packets more than threshold value are dropped. If threshold value for broadcast packets is set to '0', filtering is disabled. The default Broadcast  Threshold value is 0 per second.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.   5.10.6 WORP Intra Cell Blocking    : Intra Cell Blocking is applicable only to a BSU in Bridge Mode only.    The WORP Intra Cell Blocking feature restricts traffic between SUs which are registered to the same BSU. The two potential reasons to isolate traffic among the SUs are:  •  To provide better security by isolating the traffic from one SU to another in a public space. •  To block unwanted traffic between SUs to prevent this traffic from using bandwidth. The user can form groups of SUs at the BSU which define the filtering criteria. All data to/from SUs belonging to the same group are bridged. If a SU does not belong to any group, the BSU discards the data.  The user can also configure a Security Gateway to block traffic between SUs connected to different BSUs. All packets destined  for SUs not connected to the same BSU are forwarded to the Security Gateway MAC address (configured under Security  Gateway).     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  121
    Advanced Configuration    The following rules apply to Intra Cell Blocking Groups:  •  A SU can be assigned to more than one group. •  A SU that has not been assigned to any group cannot communicate to any other SU connected to the same or different BSU. Example of Intra-Cell Blocking Groups Assume that four Intra Cell Blocking Groups have been configured on a BSU. SUs 1 through 10 are registered to the BSU.  Group1 Group2 Group3 Group4 SU1 SU2 SU6 SU8 SU4 SU3 SU1 SU9 SU5 SU8 SU7 SU10  In this example, SU1 belongs to two groups, Group 1 and Group 3. Therefore, packets from SU1 destined to SU4, SU5, SU6  and SU7 are not blocked. However, SU9 belongs to group 4 only and packets from SU9 are blocked unless sent to SU8 or SU  10.  To configuring Intra-Cell Blocking parameters, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Filtering> WORP Intra Cell Blocking. The following screen appears:                   Figure 5-70 Intra Cell Blocking  This screen is classified into two categories: Intra Cell Blocking and Security Gateway. Tabulated below are the configuration details.   Parameter Description Intra Cell Blocking Status  By default, Intra Cell Blocking is disabled on a BSU. Select Enable to enable the feature and then Click OK and then COMMIT. Security Gateway Status  By default, Security Gateway is disabled on a BSU. Select Enable to enable the feature.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  122
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description MAC Address  Represents the MAC address of the security gateway. This gateway routes the packets transmitted by the SU to the different BSUs to which it belongs.  After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.    : Intra Cell Blocking is configurable only in Bridge mode. When you change the device from Bridge to Routing mode or vice-versa, Intra-Cell Blocking stops or starts working only after a Reboot.   5.10.6.1 WORP Intra Cell Blocking Group Table  The user can form groups of SUs at the BSU which define the filtering criteria. All data to/from SUs belonging to the same group are bridged. If a SU does not belong to any group, the BSU discards the data.  By default, a BSU supports 16 groups and each group can contain a maximum of 240 SUs. Please note that a single SU can be a member of all the existing groups.  To view and configure the Intra Cell Blocking Group table, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Filtering> WORP Intra Cell Blocking > Group Table. The WORP Intra Cell Blocking Group Table screen appears:                                 Figure 5-71 WORP Intra Cell Blocking Group Table       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  123
    Advanced Configuration   This table displays the list of groups. If the Entry Status for a group is set to Enable then BSU discards all the packets coming from SUs which are not members of that group. If set to Disable, then allows all the packets coming from SUs which are not the members of that group. If you have changed the Entry Status of a group, then click OK and then COMMIT.   5.10.6.2 WORP Intra Cell Blocking MAC Table  The WORP Intra Cell Blocking MAC table allows to add SU’s MAC address and assign them to the groups. A maximum of 250 SUs can be added to the table.  To add SU to the table, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Filtering > WORP Intra Cell Blocking > MAC Table. The WORP Intra Cell Blocking MAC Table screen appears:            Figure 5-72 WORP Intra Cell Blocking MAC Table  To add MAC addresses, click Add. The following screen appears.                         Figure 5-73 WORP Intra Cell Blocking MAC Table Add Row              Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  124
    Advanced Configuration   Tabulated below is the table which explains the WORP Intra Cell Blocking MAC Table entries and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description MAC Address  Represents the SU’s MAC address. Group ID’s 1 to 16  By default, a Group ID is disabled meaning which the SU is not a part of that group. To make it a part of that group, select Enable.  Entry Status  If SU is part of a group and its Entry Status is enabled then it can communicate with all the SUs belonging to that group. If Entry Status is disabled, then the communication is  blocked.   After adding the MAC address, click Add.  To edit the existing MAC addresses, click Edit icon in the WORP Intra Cell Blocking MAC Table screen. Modify the parameters as desired in the WORP Intra Cell Blocking MAC Table Add Row screen and click OK and then COMMIT.  In the WORP Intra Cell Blocking MAC Table, you can change the Entry Status as either Enable/Disable/Delete. Once the status is changed, click OK and then COMMIT.   5.11 DHCP  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a network protocol that enables a server to assign an IP address to the DHCP client from a defined range of IP addresses configured for a given network. Allocating IP addresses from a central location simplifies the process of configuring IP addresses to individual DHCP clients, and also avoids IP conflicts.  5.11.1 DHCP Pool  DHCP Pool is a pool of defined IP addresses which enables a DHCP Server to dynamically pick IP address from the pool and assign it to the DHCP client.  To configure a range of IP addresses in the DHCP Pool, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > DHCP > DHCP Server > Pool. The DHCP Pool screen appears:            Figure 5-74 DHCP Pool  Each pool entry comprises the following tabulated information:   Parameter Description Interface  Specifies the interface type, that is, Bridge or Routing (Ethernet and Wireless). Start IP Address and  Specifies the start and end IP address of the addresses to be added to the pool. End IP Address Delete  Allows you to delete a pool entry.   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  125
    Advanced Configuration     : A maximum of five pool entries can be added to the table. A pool entry can be deleted but cannot be edited.   5.11.1.1 Adding a New Pool Entry  To add a new entry to the DHCP Pool, click Add on the DHCP Pool screen. The following DHCP Pool Table Add Row screen  appears:               Figure 5-75 DHCP Pool Table Add Row  Enter the pool details and click Add. The entry will be updated in the DHCP pool table. To apply the configured changes, click COMMIT.  5.11.2 DHCP Server  If DHCP Server is enabled, it picks automatically the IP addresses from the specific interface address pool and assigns them to the respective DHCP clients.  DHCP Server feature is applicable to both Bridge and Routing Mode. In Routing mode, DHCP Server can be configured for each interface (Ethernet and Wireless) separately. Unless the DHCP Server functionality is enabled for an interface, the DHCP Server does not respond to the DHCP requests received on that interface.  To configure the DHCP server parameters, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > DHCP > DHCP Server > Interface. The DHCP Server screen appears:                     Figure 5-76 DHCP Server     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  126
    Advanced Configuration   Tabulated below is the table which explains DHCP Server parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description DHCP Server Status  By default, DHCP Server is disabled on a device. To enable DHCP Server, select Enable.  A DHCP Server can be enabled only when the following two conditions are satisfied:  1. Before enabling, atleast one interface should be enabled on which the DHCP Server    has to run.  2. The DHCP pool table should have atleast one pool configured for that interface.  Max Lease Time  Specifies the maximum lease time for which the DHCP client can use the IP address  provided by the DHCP Server. The value ranges from 3600 - 172800 seconds.  DHCP Interface Table  Interface Type  Specifies the interface for which the DHCP Server functionality shall be configured. That is Bridge or Ethernet/Wireless in case of Routing mode.  Net Mask  Specifies the subnet mask to be sent to the DHCP client along with the assigned IP address. The netmask configured here should be greater than or equal to the netmask configured on the interface. Default Gateway  Specifies the default gateway to be sent to the DHCP client along with the assigned IP Address. Default Gateway is a node that serves as an accessing point to another network. Primary DNS  Specifies the primary DNS (Domain Name Server) IP address to be sent to the DHCP client. Secondary DNS  Specifies the secondary DNS IP address to be sent to the DHCP client. Default Lease Time  DHCP Server uses this option to specify the lease time it is willing to offer to the DHCP client over that interface. Once the lease time expires, the DHCP Server allocates a new IP address to the device. The Default Lease Time should be less than or equal to the configured Max Lease Time. Comment  Specifies a note for the device administrator. Entry Status  Used to Enable or Disable the DHCP Server functionality over the interface.  After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.  5.11.3 DHCP Relay (Routing Mode only)  The DHCP relay agent forwards DHCP requests to the configured DHCP Server. A maximum of 5 DHCP Servers can be configured. There must be at least one DHCP Server configured in order to relay DHCP request.    : DHCP Relay Agent is configurable only in Routing mode. It cannot be enabled when NAT or DHCP Server are enabled.   To view and configure DHCP Relay Server parameters, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > DHCP > DHCP Relay > Relay Server. The DHCP Relay screen appears:          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  127
    Advanced Configuration                  Figure 5-77 DHCP Relay  By default, DHCP Relay is disabled on the device. To enable it, atleast one DHCP Server IP address should be configured.  To add a DHCP Server to the Relay Server Table, click Add in the DHCP Relay screen. The DHCP Relay Server Add Row screen appears:            Figure 5-78 DHCP Relay Server Add Row  Enter the DHCP Server IP Address and then click Add.  After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.    : DHCP server is disabled automatically if DHCP Relay agent is enabled and vise-verse.   5.12 IGMP Snooping   : IGMP Snooping is applicable only in a Bridge Mode.    Proxim’s Tsunami® devices support Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping feature. With IGMP Snooping enabled on the device, multicast traffic is only forwarded to ports that are members of the specific multicast group. By forwarding the traffic only to the destined ports, reduces unnecessary load on devices to process packets.  Explained below is the IGMP Snooping process with the help of a diagram:              Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  128
    Advanced Configuration                                      Figure 5-79 IGMP Snooping Process  The router forwards the IP multicast data to the BSU/End Point A.  Lets say, with IGMP Snooping not enabled on the BSU/End Point A, the multicast data is transmitted over the wireless medium irrespective of whether the multicast group address is a member of the multicast group table maintained in each BSU/End Point A. With IGMP Snooping enabled, the BSU/End Point A transmits the data only when the multicast group address is a member of the multicast group table, else drops the packet. The SU/End Point B will receive the multicast data.  Similarly, with IGMP Snooping not enabled on the SU/End Point B, the multicast data is transmitted irrespective of whether the multicast group address is a member of the multicast group table maintained in each SU/End Point B. With IGMP Snooping enabled, the SU/End Point B transmits the data to the host only when the multicast group address is a member of the multicast group table, else drops the packet.  IGMP Snooping is of 2 kinds:  •  Active: Active IGMP Snooping listens to IGMP traffic and filters IGMP packets to reduce load on the multicast router. •  Passive: Passive IGMP Snooping simply listens to IGMP traffic and does not filter or interfere with IGMP.          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  129
    Advanced Configuration     :   • Tsunami® devices supports only passive IGMP Snooping.  • IGMP versions v1,v2 and v3 are supported.  • The device can add a maximum of 64 Multicast groups in the Snooping table.    To configure IGMP Snooping parameters, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > IGMP Snooping. The following IGMP Snooping screen appears:              Figure 5-80 IGMP Snooping  Tabulated below is the table which explains IGMP Snooping parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description IGMP Snooping Status  By default, IGMP Snooping Status is disabled on the device, meaning which, the device transmits IP multicast traffic to all the ports. To forward the traffic only to the members of the specific multicast group, enable IGMP Snooping Status. IGMP Membership  Represents the time after which the IGMP multicast group age-outs or elapses. It ranges Aging Timer  from 135 to 635 seconds. The default Aging Timer is 260 seconds. IGMP Router Port  Represents the time after which the IGMP Router port age-outs or elapses. It ranges from Aging Timer  260 to 635 seconds. The default Aging Timer is 300 seconds. IGMP Forced Flood  If you select Yes, all the unregistered IPv4 multicast traffic (with destination address which does not match any of the groups announced in earlier IGMP Membership reports) and  IGMP Membership Reports will be flooded to all the ports. By default, IGMP Forced Flood  is set to No.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.   5.13 Routing Mode Features  This section provides an overview of all the features applicable in routing mode only.  5.13.1 Static Route Table  The Static Route Table stores the route to various destinations in the network. When packets are to be routed, the routing table is referred for the destination address.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  130
    Advanced Configuration   To configure the static routing table, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Network > Static Route Table. The Static Route Table screen appears.                Figure 5-81 Static Route Table  Tabulated below is the table which explains Static Route Table entries and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Static Route Status  If Static Route Status is enabled, the packets are sent as per route configured in the static routing table. If disabled, forwards the packet to the default gateway. Destination Address  Represents the destination IP address to which the data has to be routed. Subnet Mask  Represents the subnet mask of the destination IP address to which the data has to be routed.  Route Next Hop   Represents the IP address of the next hop to reach the destination IP address. Next hop IP  should belong to at least one of the subnets connected to the device.  Admin Metric  It is a metric that specifies the distance to the destination IP address, usually counted in hops. The lower the metric, the better. The metrics can range from 0 to 16. Entry Status  If enabled, considers the packets for routing. If disabled, forwards the packet to the default gateway.                             Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  131
    Advanced Configuration    5.13.1.1 Adding Static Route Entries  Click Add in the Static Route Table screen.The following Static Route Table Add Row screen appears:               Figure 5-82 Static Route Table Add Row  Add the route entries and click Add and then COMMIT.    :  •  A maximum of 256 routes can be added to the static route table. •  The IP address of the Next Hop must be on the subnet of one of the device’s network interfaces.  5.13.2 Network Address Translation (NAT)   : NAT is applicable only to a SU and an End Point B.    The Network Address Translation (NAT) feature allows hosts on the Ethernet side of the SU or End Point B device to transparently access the public network through the BSU/End Point A device. All the hosts in the private network can have simultaneous access to the public network.  The SU/End Point B device supports Network Address Port Translation (NAPT) feature, where all the private IP addresses are mapped to a single public IP address.  The SU/End Point B device supports both dynamic mapping (allowing private hosts to access hosts in the public network) and static mapping (allowing public hosts to access hosts in the private network) are supported.  1.  Static NAT: Static mapping is used to provide inbound access. The SU/End Point B maps the public IP address and its    transport identifiers to the private IP address (local host address) in the local network. This is used to provide inbound    access to a local server for hosts in the public network. Static port mapping allows only one server of a particular type.    A maximum of 100 entries are supported in the static port bind table.  2.  Dynamic NAT: In dynamic mapping, the SU/End Point B maps the private IP addresses and its transport identifiers to    transport identifiers of a single Public IP address as they originate sessions to the public network. This is used only for   outbound access.    :  • When NAT is enabled, the network on the wireless side of the device is considered public and the network on the Ethernet side is considered private.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  132
    Advanced Configuration   • When NAT functionality is enabled, the DHCP Relay and RIP features are not supported. The DHCP Relay Agent and RIP must be disabled before enabling NAT.   To configure NAT parameters, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Network > NAT. The following NAT screen  appears:                    Figure 5-83 NAT  Tabulated below is the table which explains NAT parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Status  This parameter is used to either enable or disable NAT on a SU or an End Point A. Dynamic Start Port  Represents the start and end port sessions originated from private to public host. and Dynamic End Port  By default, the Dynamic Start Port is configured to 1 and Dynamic End Port is configured to 65535. Configure the start and end port as desired.   : Care should be taken to avoid overlap of Dynamic Port range and Static Port  range.  Port Forwarding  This parameter is used to either enable or disable the Static NAT feature within different Status  networks. It allows public hosts to access hosts in a private network. By default, it is disabled.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.    :  • To enable Dynamic NAT, set the NAT Status to Enable. To enable Static NAT, set the NAT Status to Enable and the Port Forwarding Status to Enable.  • NAT uses the IP address of the wireless interface as the Public IP address.         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  133
    Advanced Configuration   To add entries in the NAT Port Bind Table, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Network > NAT > Static Port Bind. The NAT Port Bind Table screen appears. Click Add in the NAT Port Bind Table screen. The following NAT Port Bind Table Add Row appears:               Figure 5-84 NAT Port Bind Table Add Row  Tabulated below is the table which explains the NAT Port Bind Table entries and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Local Address  Enter the local IP Address of the host on the Ethernet (private) side of the SU/End Point B. Port Type  Select the Port Type as: TCP, UDP, or Both. Start and End Port  Represents the start and end port for transferring the data from public to private host. Number  : Care should be taken to avoid overlap of Dynamic Port range and Static Port  range.  Entry Status  If enabled, the data is transferred from the public network to the private host, on the specified ports.   After configuring the required parameters, click ADD and then COMMIT.   5.13.2.1 Supported Session Protocols  Certain applications require an Application Level Gateway (ALG) to provide the required transparency for an application running on a host in a private network to connect to its counterpart running on a host in the public network. An ALG may interact with NAT to set up state information, use NAT state information, modify application-specific payload, and perform the tasks necessary to get the application running across address realms.  No more than one server of a particular type is supported within the private network behind the SU/End Point B. The following table lists the supported protocols with their corresponding default ALG's:   S.No. Protocol  Support  Applications 1 H.323  H.323 ALG  Multimedia Conferencing 2  HTTP  Port Mapping for inbound connection  Web Browser 3  TFTP  Port Mapping for inbound connection  Trivial file transfer 4  Telnet  Port Mapping for inbound connection  Remote login   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  134
    Advanced Configuration    S.No. Protocol  Support  Applications 5  IRC  Port Mapping for inbound connection  Chat and file transfer 6  AMANDA  Port Mapping for inbound connection  Backup and archiving 7  FTP  FTP ALG  File Transfer 8  PPTP  PPTP ALG  VPN related 9  SNMP  SNMP ALG  Network Management 10  DNS  Port Mapping for inbound connection  Domain Name Service  5.13.3 RIP  Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is a dynamic routing protocol, which can be used to automatically propagate routing table information between routers. The device can be configured in RIPv1, RIPv2, or both while operating in Routing mode.  When a router receives a routing update including changes to an entry, it updates its routing table to reflect the new route. RIP maintains only the best route to a destination. Therefore, whenever new information provides a better route, the old route information is replaced.    : RIP is configurable only when the devices are in Routing Mode and Network Address Translation (NAT) is disabled.   To configure RIP parameters, navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Network > RIP. The following RIP screen  appears:                     Figure 5-85 RIP  By default, RIP is not enabled on the device. To enabled, select Enable and click OK. The RIP screen is updated with the following tabulated parameters:.   Parameter Description Name  Displays the interface type as either Ethernet 1, Ethernet 2, or Wireless. Status  Enables you to either enable or disable RIP for a particular network interface.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  135
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description Authorization Type  Enables you to select the appropriate Authorization Type. This parameter is not applicable if RIP v1 is selected as the Version number. Authorization Key  Enter the authorization key. This parameter is not applicable if RIP v1 is selected as the Version number. It is not applicable when the Authorization Type is set to None. Version Number  Select RIP Version number from the Version Number list. Available options are V1, V2 and both. The default is V2. Direction  You can enable RIP for both receiving and transmitting the data. To enable RIP only for Receiving, select Rx Only. To enable RIP for both receiving and transmitting, select Rx and  Tx.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.    :  •  Authorization Type and Authorization Key are valid only for RIPV2 and both versions. •  The maximum metric of a RIP network is 15 hops, that is, a maximum of 15 routers can be traversed between a source and destination network before a network is considered unreachable. •  By default, a RIP router will broadcast or multicast its complete routing table for every 30 seconds, regardless of whether anything has changed. •  RIP supports the split horizon, poison reverse and triggered update mechanisms to prevent incorrect routing updates being propagated. 5.13.4 PPPoE End Point (SU Only)  Proxim’s SU devices support Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) which is a network protocol for transmitting PPP frames over Ethernet. This feature is commonly used by Internet Service Providers (ISPs) to establish a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Internet service connection with clients.  The Proxim’s SU devices support PPPoE only when they are configured in Routing Mode with NAT enabled. Also, the BSU should always operate in Bridge Mode.                  Figure 5-86 PPPoE Architecture  Given below are the stages for a PPPoE client to establish link with the PPPoE server and then transfer PPP frames over  Ethernet:    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  136
    Advanced Configuration   •   Discovery and Session Stage: In this stage, to initiate a PPPoE session, the PPPoE client discovers a PPPoE server    (called Access Concentrator). Once discovered, a session ID is assigned and a session is established.  •   Point-to-point Protocol (PPP) Stages: The PPP stage comprises the following sub-stages:  1.  Physical Link: For sending and receiving PPP frames, the PPP driver calls the services of PPP Channels (used in    connection with serial links). A PPP channel encapsulates a mechanism for transporting PPP frames from one    machine to another and then the frames are forwarded on the physical Ethernet link.  2.  Link Establishment: In this stage, Link Configuration Protocol (LCP) performs the basic setup of the link. As part    of this setup, the configuration process is undertaken whereby the PPPoE client and the server negotiate and    agree on the parameters on how data should be passed between them. Only when both the client and server    come to an agreement, the link is considered to be open and will proceed to the Authentication stage.  3.  Authentication: In this stage, LCP invokes an authentication protocol (PAP/CHAP/MS CHAP v2/EAP-MD5) when    PPP is configured to use authentication.  4.  Encryption: In this stage, both PPPoE client and server negotiate the encryption protocol configuration. Our  device support MPPE as encryption protocol. MPPE is negotiated within option 18 in the PPP Compression Control Protocol (CCP).  5.  Network Layer Protocol: After successful authentication, the link proceeds to the Network-Layer Protocol stage.    In this stage, the specific configuration of the appropriate network layer protocol is performed by invoking the    appropriate Network Control Protocol (NCP) such as IPCP. We support only IPCP Protocol as a part of NCP.  Given below are the features supported by PPPoE client:  •  Preferred Server Configuration by using Access Concentrator Name/Service Name •  PAP/CHAP/MSCHAP v2/EAP-MD5 Authentication Protocols •  IP Configuration: Static IP/ PPPoE-IPCP •  Echo Interval and Echo Failure to detect server unavailability •  MPPE with stateful and stateless mode aligned with 40/56/128 bit encryption To configure PPPoE feature,  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Network > PPPoE > PPPoE Client. The following PPPoE Client   screen appears:            Figure 5-87 PPPoE Client Status  2.  By default, the PPPoE feature is disabled on the client. To enable, select Enable from Status drop-down box.  3.  Next, click OK. Please note that a change in the PPPoE client status requires you to reboot the device.  4.  On enabling the PPPoE client feature, the following screen appears:                Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  137
    Advanced Configuration                               Figure 5-88 PPPoE Client Configuration                                           Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  138
    Advanced Configuration    5.  Tabulated below is the table which explains PPPoE client parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):  Parameter Description Authentication  PPPoE supports the following types of user authentication protocols that provide Protocol  varying levels of security: •  None: Represents that no authentication is required for transferring PPP frames over Ethernet between PPPoE client and server.  •   Password Authentication Protocol (PAP): PAP is an access control protocol    used to authenticate client’s password on the server. The server requests a    password from the client and sends the retrieved password to an authentication    server for verification. As an authentication protocol, PAP is considered the least    secure because the password is not encrypted in transmission.  •   Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP): CHAP is similar to    PAP with several unique characteristics. Instead of requesting a password, the    server sends a challenge message to the client. The challenge message is a    random value. The client encrypts the challenge message with user's password    and sends the combination back to the server. The server forwards the    challenge/password combination to the authentication server. The    authentication server encrypts the challenge with the user's password stored in    the authentication database. If the user's response is a match, the password is    considered authentic. CHAP uses the model of a shared secret (the user    password) to authenticate the user. The use of CHAP is considered a moderately    secure method of authentication.  •   Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2  (MSCHAP v2): MSCHAP V2 is a mutual authentication method that supports password-based user or computer authentication. During the MSCHAP v2  authentication process, both the client and the server prove that they have  knowledge of the user's password for authentication to succeed. Mutual  authentication is provided by including an authenticator packet returned to the client after a successful server authentication.This method is proprietary to the Microsoft mostly used in windows servers and client.  •   EAP-MD5: EAP-MD5 enables a server to authenticate a connection request by    verifying an MD5 hash of a user's password. The server sends the client a    random challenge value, and the client proves its identity by hashing the    challenge and its password with MD5.  By default, the authentication protocol is set to CHAP. You can configure the authentication protocol to the desired one and click OK.  LCP Echo Interval  To check the link connection, periodically the PPPoE client sends an LCP echo-request  frame to the PPPoE server. If the PPPoE server respond to the echo-request by sending an echo-reply, then the connection is alive.   To configure LCP Echo Interval, enter a time ranging from 5 to 300 seconds. By default, the echo interval is set to 30 seconds.              Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  139
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description LCP Echo Failure  This parameter indicates the maximum number of consecutive failures to receive the LCP echo-reply to consider the connection to be down.   To configure LCP Echo Failure value, enter a a value ranging from 1 to 25. By default, the echo failure is set to 5.  On a noisy wireless link, it is recommended to set this  value to higher.  Preferred Service  Specifies the service which the PPPoE server (Access Concentrators) provides to the Name PPPoE client.  Leave this parameter blank, if PPPoE client accepts any service offered by the PPPoE server. To specify the desired service name, enter the service name ranging from 1 to 32 characters. Access Concentrator  Specifies Access Concentrator (PPPoE server) name. Name Leave this parameter blank, when PPPoE client can connect to any PPPoE server on the network. To connect to a desired PPPoE server, type the server name ranging from 1 to 32 characters. User Name and  Before establishing a link, the PPPoE server first authenticates the PPPoE client based Password  on the User Name and Password as shared by the service provider.  Type the user name and password in the User Name and Password box respectively. You can type user name ranging from 4 to 32 characters and password ranging from 6 to 32 characters.   : User Name and Password parameters are not applicable when the Authentication Protocol is configured as “None”.                                     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  140
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description MPPE Status  : MPPE Status parameter is applicable only when the Authentication Protocol is configured as “MSCHAP v2”.   Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption (MPPE) is a protocol for transferring encrypted data over point-to-point links. The PPPoE client negotiates on the encryption  parameters based on the MPPE Status configured.   The MPPE Status can be configured as following:  •  Mandatory: When the MPPE status is configured as Mandatory, the PPPoE    client negotiates the configured MPPE parameters with the PPPoE server. If the    server does not agree to the parameters then the link will not be established.  •  Optional: When the MPPE status is configured as Optional, the link is  established with or without encryption depending on the PPPoE server  configuration. If the PPPoE server supports MPPE encryption then the PPPoE  client agrees with the PPPoE server’s MPPE parameters and link gets established with encryption. If the PPPoE server does not support MPPE encryption then link gets established without encryption.  •  Disable: When the MPPE status is configured as Disable, then the PPPoE client    does not agree to the MPPE parameters suggested by the PPPoE server.  Configure the desired status and click OK.  Stateless Encryption  Mode   : This parameter is applicable only when Authentication Protocol is  configured as “MSCHAP v2” and MPPE Status is configured as “Mandatory”.   When stateless encryption is negotiated, the session key changes for every packet  transferred. In stateless mode, the sender must change its key before encrypting and transmitting each packet and the receiver must change its key after receiving, but before decrypting, each packet.   When stateful encryption is negotiated, the PPPoE server and the client monitor the synchronization of MPP encryption engine on both the sides. When one of the peer detects that they are out of sync then the peer should transmit a packet with the coherency count set to 0xFF(a flag packet); the sender must change its key before encrypting and transmitting any packet and the receiver must change its key after receiving a flag packet, but before decrypting.   To enable stateless encryption, select Enable. To enable stateful encryption, select  Disable.   : Enabling Stateless Encryption impacts throughput. It is useful to enable  Stateless encryption when packet drops are more in the wireless link.          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  141
    Advanced Configuration    Parameter Description MPPE Key Length  : This parameter is applicable only when Authentication Protocol is  configured as “MSCHAP v2” and MPPE Status is configured as  “Mandatory”.   MPPE supports 40-bit, 56-bit and 128-bit encryption key length. To configure the  desired key length, select a key length from the MPPE Key Length drop-down box.  Link Status  Indicates the status of the PPPoE link between the PPPoE client and server.  The link can be in any of the following three stages:  •  Disconnected: No connection is established between PPPoE client and server.  •  Connecting: A connection attempt is in progress between PPPoE client and   server.  •  Connected: Connection is established between PPPoE client and server. The Link Status can be viewed in Home Page.   6.  After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT. Reboot the device, if you have changed the    PPPoE Status configuration.  5.13.5 IP over IP Tunneling  Proxim’s point-to-multipoint and point-to-point devices support IP Tunnelling, which serves as a communication channel between two disjoint IP networks that do not have a native routing path to communicate with each other.  To enable communication between two disjoint networks using IP Tunneling, the following steps are involved:  1.  The tunnel entry point receives the IP packet (Sender Source IP + Recipient IP) sent by the original sender.    IP Packet  Sender Source IP  Recipient IP  2.  The tunnel entry point encapsulates the IP packet (Sender Source IP + Recipient IP) with the IP addresses of the tunnel    endpoints. The tunneled packet (Sender Source IP + Recipient IP + Tunnel Entry Point IP + Tunnel Exit Point IP) is then    forwarded to the tunnel exit point.    Tunneled IP Packet  (Inner IP Header)  (Outer IP Header) Sender Source IP  Recipient IP  Tunnel Entry Point IP  Tunnel Exit Point IP  3.  On receiving the tunneled packet, the tunnel exit point removes the tunnel IP addresses and forwards the packet to    the recipient. The inner IP header Source Address and Destination Address identify the original sender and recipient of    the packet, respectively. The outer IP header Source Address and Destination Address identify the endpoints of the   tunnel.  The following figure shows an IP tunnel configuration using two end points.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  142
    Advanced Configuration                      Figure 5-89 An Example: Tunnel Configuration  Lets say that the Computer with an IP address: 10.0.0.1 wants to communicate with the Computer with an IP address: 192.168.9.101. Since there is no native routing path between these two computers, the communication can happen via the tunnel. The SU1device with wireless IP address: 20.0.0.132 and SU2 device with wireless IP address: 30.0.0.132 are the end points of the tunnel, respectively.  With IP tunneling, the tunnel entry point (SU1) encapsulates the tunnel end points IP addresses (20.0.0.132 + 30.0.0.132) with the sender IP addresses (10.0.0.1 + 192.168.9.101) before sending the data through the tunnel. When the tunnel exit point (SU2) receives traffic, it removes the outer IP header before forwarding the packet to the recipient.   IP Packet  Sender Source IP (10.0.0.1)   Recipient IP (192.168.9.101)     Tunneled IP Packet (Inner IP Header)  (Outer IP Header) Sender Source IP  Recipient IP  Tunnel Entry Point IP  Tunnel Exit Point IP (10.0.0.1) (192.168.9.101) (20.0.0.132) (30.0.0.132)   : IP tunnel establishment does not involve any protocol message exchange. To setup an IP tunnel, the device has to be configured properly on both the ends.   By following the steps below, the tunnel is automatically established.  1.  Create a tunnel (Refer to Create a Tunnel)   To create a tunnel as given in Figure 5-89, do the following: SU1 Configuration  — Virtual IP Address = 50.0.0.1  — Local IP Address = 20.0.0.132    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  143
    Advanced Configuration    — Remote IP Address = 30.0.0.132  SU2 Configuration  — Virtual IP address = 50.0.0.2  — Local IP Address = 30.0.0.132  — Remote IP Address = 20.0.0.132    2.  Add a Static Route for Remote IP Address of the tunnel (Refer to Static Route Table)  •  On SU1, add a static route for 30.0.0.xxx as next hop 20.0.0.1 •  On SU2, add a static route for 20.0.0.xxx as next hop 30.0.0.1   3.  Add a route for the pass-through traffic through the tunnel (Next Hop IP Address should be that of the tunnel interface). •  On SU1, add a static route for 192.168.9.xxx as next hop 50.0.0.1 •  On SU2, add a static route for 10.0.0.xxx as next hop 50.0.0.2  5.13.5.1 Create a Tunnel  To create a Tunnel interface,  1.  Navigate to ADVANCED CONFIGURATION > Network > IP Tunneling. The following IP Tunneling screen appears:         Figure 5-90 IP Tunneling Status  2.  By default, the IP Tunneling feature is disabled on the device. To enable, select Enable from the Tunneling Status   drop-down box.  3.  Next, click OK.  4.  On enabling the IP Tunneling feature, the following screen appears:              Figure 5-91 IP Tunneling Interfaces  5.  Click Add, to create a new tunnel interface. The following Tunneling Table Add Row screen appears:       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  144
    Advanced Configuration                      Figure 5-92 Adding a new Tunnel Interface  6.  Tabulated below is the table which explains the parameters for creating a new tunnel:  Parameter Description Name  Represents the name of the tunnel interface. Type a name for the tunnel interface. Encapsulation  The device supports two types of network tunnels: Method  •  ipip: A tunnelling protocol that allow only IP traffic over the tunnel. •  gre (Generic Routing Encapsulation): A tunneling protocol that allows encapsulation of a wide variety of packet types in Internet Protocol (IP) packets, thereby creating a virtual point-to-point link. Select the tunnel type as either ipip or gre. Virtual IP Address  Represents the virtual IP address of the tunnel interface. Enter the virtual IP address of the tunnel interface. Local IP Address  Represents the IP address of the tunnel entry point. Select the IP address of the tunnel entry point from the available list of addresses. Remote IP Address  Represents the IP address of the tunnel exit point. Type the IP address of the tunnel  exit point. Please note that the Remote IP address should be routable.  TTL  TTL stands for Time to Live. This parameter enables to configure a fixed TTL value on the tunneled packets. The TTL value can be configured in the range 0 to 255. By  default, the TTL value is set to 0 meaning that tunneled packets inherit the TTL value from the IP packet originated by the sender.  Entry Status  By using this parameter, a tunnel interface can be enabled or disabled. By default, it is enabled. To disable, select Disable.   7. Next, click Add.   :  • A maximum of 16 tunnels can be created on a device.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  145
    Advanced Configuration    • The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) of the tunnel interface depends on the underlying interface.  • It is advised that both PPPoE and the IP Tunneling feature do not function simultaneously on the device.  • IP configuration of Ethernet and Wireless interface should NOT be in the same subnet of virtual IP addresses of  tunnels.   5.13.5.2 View Existing Tunnels  The IP Tunneling screen displays all the tunnels created on the device. The entries against each tunnel cannot be edited. However, the status of each tunnel entry can be modified.  You can either enable, disable or delete a tunnel by selecting the desired one from Entry Status box in the IP Tunneling  screen.               Figure 5-93 IP Tunneling Interfaces                                               Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  146
6      Management    This chapter provides information on how to manage the device by using Web interface. It contains information on the following: •  System •  File Management •  Services •  Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) •  Access Control •  Reset to Factory •  Convert QB to MP  6.1 System  The System tab enables you to configure system specific information such as System Name, contact information of the person managing the device, and view system inventory and license information.  6.1.1 System Information  The System Information tab enables you to view and configure system specific information such as System Name, System Description, Contact Details of the person managing the device, and so on.  To view and configure system specific Information, navigate to MANAGEMENT > System > Information. The System Information screen appears:                       Figure 6-1 System Information  Tabulated below is the table which explains System parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  147
    Management     Parameter Description System Up-Time  This is a read-only parameter. It represents the operational time of the device since its last reboot. System Description  This is a read-only parameter. It provides system description such as system name, firmware version and the latest firmware build supported.  For example: Tsunami MP-8100-BSU-WD-v2.4.0  System Name  Represents the name assigned to the device. You can enter a system name of maximum 64 characters.  Email  Represents the email address of the person administering the device. You can enter an email address of minimum 6 and maximum 32 characters. Phone Number  Represents the phone number of the person administering the device. You can enter a phone number of minimum 6 and maximum 32 characters. Location  Represents the location where the device is installed. You can enter the location name of minimum 0 and maximum 255 characters. GPS Longitude  Represents the longitude at which the device is installed. You can enter a longitude value of minimum 0 and maximum 255 characters. GPS Latitude  Represents the latitude at which the device is installed. You can enter a latitude value of minimum 0 and maximum 255 characters.  GPS Altitude  Represents the altitude at which the device is installed. You can enter a altitude value of minimum 0 and maximum 255 characters.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.  6.1.2 Inventory Management  The Inventory Management tab provides inventory information about the device.  To view inventory information, navigate to MANAGEMENT > System >  Inventory Management. The System Inventory Management Table appears.                             Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  148
    Management                      Figure 6-2 Inventory Management  By default, the components information is auto-generated by the device and is used only for reference purpose. Click Refresh, to view the updated system inventory management information.  6.1.3 Licensed Features  Licensing is considered to be the most important component of an enterprise-class device which typically has a feature-based pricing model. It is also required to prevent the misuse and tampering of the device by a wide-variety of audience whose motives may be intentional or accidental.  Licensed Features are, by default, set by the company.  To view the licensed features set on the device, click MANAGEMENT > System > Licensed Features. The Licensed Features screen appears.                 Figure 6-3 Licensed Features  Tabulated below is the table which explains each of the parameters:   Parameter Description Product Description  Description about the device.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  149
    Management    Parameter Description Number of Radios  The number of radios that the device is licensed to operate. Number of Ethernet  The number of Ethernet interfaces supported by the device. Interfaces  Radio 1 Allowed  The operational frequency band supported by the device radio. Frequency Band Maximum Output  The maximum output bandwidth limit of the device. It is represented in mbps. Bandwidth Maximum Input  The maximum input bandwidth limit of the device. It is represented in mbps. Bandwidth : The Input and Output Bandwidth features are referred with respect to the  wireless interface. Input bandwidth refers to the data received on the wireless  interface and output bandwidth refers to the data sent out of the wireless  interface.  Maximum Aggregate  The maximum cumulative bandwidth of the device, which is the sum of configured output Bandwidth  and input bandwidths. Product Family  Represents the product family of the device. Product Class  Represents the product class of the device, which is either indoor or outdoor. Allowed Operational  Represents the operational mode of the device, that is, BSU/SU/End Point A/End Point B. Modes of Radio1  Maximum SUs  The maximum number of SUs that a BSU supports. Allowed MAC address of the  The MAC address of the device. Device is  6.2 File Management  The File Management tab enables you to upgrade the firmware and configuration files onto the device, and retrieve  configuration and log files from the device through Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP).  6.2.1 TFTP Server  A Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server lets you transfer files across a network. By using TFTP, you can retrieve files from the device for backup or copying, and you can upgrade the firmware or the configuration files onto the device. You can download the SolarWinds TFTP server application from http://support.proxim.com. You can also download the latest TFTP software from SolarWinds Web site at http://www.solarwinds.net.  While using TFTP server, ensure the following:  •  The upload or download directory is correctly set (the default directory is C:\TFTP-Root). •  The required firmware file is present in the directory. •  The TFTP server is running during file upload and download. You can check the connectivity between the device and the TFTP server by pinging the device from the Personal Computer that hosts the TFTP server. The ping program should show replies from the device.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  150
    Management    •  The TFTP server should be configured to transmit and receive files (on the Security tab under File > Configure), with no automatic shutdown or time-out (on the Auto-Close tab).  : The instructions listed above are based on the assumption that you are using the SolarWinds TFTP server; otherwise the configuration may vary.  6.2.2 Text Based Configuration (TBC) File Management  Text Based Configuration (TBC) file is a simple text file that holds device template configurations. The device supports the TBC file in XML format which can be edited in any XML or text editors.  You can generate the TBC file from the CLI Session and manually edit the configurations and then load the edited TBC file to the device so that the edited configurations are applied onto the device. It differs mainly from the binary configuration file in terms of manual edition of configurations. The generated TBC file is a template which has only the default and modified configurations on the live CLI session.   6.2.2.1 Generating TBC File  The TBC file is generated through CLI by executing generate command.  While generating the TBC file from CLI, there is an option to generate it with or without all Management and Security  Passwords.  The  management  passwords  include  CLI/WEB/SNMP  passwords.  The  security  passwords  include Network-Secret/Encryption-Key(s)/RADIUS-Shared-Secret. If included, these passwords become a part of the generated TBC file and are in a readable form. If excluded, all these passwords are not part of the generated TBC file.  The commands used for the generation of TBC file are:  T8000-00:00:01# generate tbc-with-pwds  T8000-00:00:01# generate tbc-without-pwds  The generated TBC file contains,  • Default configurations •  Any user-added or edited configurations on current live CLI session The generated Text Based Template Configuration file appears as shown below:                                  Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  151
    Management                                          Figure 6-4 TBC File in xml Format   6.2.2.2 Editing the TBC File  The TBC file can easily be opened and edited in any standard Text-Editors like Wordpad, MS-Word, Notepad++, Standard XML Editors. Proxim recommends XML Notepad 7 editor for editing the TBC file.  •  You can modify any value between the double quotes(““) in the TBC file. It is recommended not to change the text outside the double quotes (“”) or XML tags in the TBC file. •  Remove unchanged configurations from the TBC file before loading onto the device.  6.2.2.3 Loading the TBC file The TBC file can be loaded onto the device by using either SNMP, Web Interface or CLI. You can either use TFTP or HTTP to load the TBC file.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  152
    Management   By using Web Interface, you can load the TBC file by navigating to MANAGEMENT > File Management > Upgrade Configuration. To load the TBC file, it should be generated or downloaded onto the device. While loading the TBC file onto the device, any file name is accepted. Once loaded, the TBC file name is renamed to PXM-TBC.xml.  If the TBC file does not contain correct XML syntax, the file will be discarded with DOM error and no configurations will be loaded. All duplicate values entered are considered as errors while loading and syslogs will be generated accordingly. Therefore, it is recommended to delete all unchanged parameters from the TBC file during its edition. Commit is required to retain the configurations across reboots after loading the TBC file.   : Both Commit and Reboot are required to accept the modifications done in the TBC File. Only reboot is required to reject the modifications.  Loading the TBC file is allowed only once in an active device session (that is, if TBC file is loaded, reboot is required to apply all configurations or to load another TBC file). All configurations in the TBC file are loaded to the device irrespective of their default or modified or added configurations. Loading the TBC file takes approximately 10-20 seconds depending on the number of configurations added.    :  • Remove any unmodified parameters from the TBC file, before loading it.  • If you get any timeout errors while loading TBC file from SNMP interface, increase the time-out value to more than 30 seconds in the MIB Browser.  6.2.3 Upgrade Firmware  You can update the device with the latest firmware either through HTTP or TFTP.    : Make sure the firmware being loaded is compatible to the device being upgraded.   6.2.3.1 Upgrade Firmware via HTTP  To upgrade the firmware via HTTP, do the following:  1.  Navigate to MANAGEMENT > File Management > Upgrade Firmware > HTTP.                  Figure 6-5 Upgrade Firmware - HTTP  2.  In the HTTP screen, click Browse to select the latest firmware file from the desired location. Ensure that the file name    does not contain any space or special characters.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  153
    Management    3.  Click Update.  4.  Once the update successfully completes, reboot the device.   6.2.3.2 Upgrade Firmware via TFTP  To upgrade the firmware via TFTP Server, do the following:  1.  Navigate to MANAGEMENT > File Management > Upgrade Firmware > TFTP.                   Figure 6-6 Upgrade Firmware - TFTP  2.  Enter the TFTP Server IP Address in the Server IP Address box.  3.  Enter the name of the latest firmware file (including the file extension) that has to be loaded onto the device in the   File Name box.  4.  To update the device with new firmware, click either Update, or Update & Reboot. If you click Update, then you   should reboot the device after loading the files. Whereas, if you click Update and Reboot, the system will   automatically reboot the device after loading the files.    :  •  After updating the device with the new firmware, reboot the device; Otherwise the device will continue to run with the old firmware. •  It is recommended not to navigate away from the upgrade screen, while the update is in progress. 6.2.4 Upgrade Configuration  You can update the device with the latest configuration files either through HTTP or TFTP.    : Make sure the configuration file being loaded into the device is compatible. That is, the configuration file being loaded should have been retrieved from a device of the same SKU.   6.2.4.1 Upgrade Configuration via HTTP  To upgrade the configuration files by using HTTP, do the following:  1.  Navigate to MANAGEMENT > File Management > Upgrade Configuration > HTTP.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  154
    Management                   Figure 6-7 Upgrade Configuration - HTTP  2.  In the HTTP screen, click Browse to locate the configuration file. Select Flashcfg.cfg for Binary Configuration file and   PXM-TBC.xml for Text Based Configuration file. Make sure that the file name does not contain any space or special   characters.  3.  If you are updating the device with Binary Configuration file then click Update and then reboot the device.  4.  If you are updating the device with Text Based Configuration file then,  a.  Click Update to update the device with the config file and then click Load for loading the config file onto the    device. Alternatively, you can perform both update and load operation in one single step, by clicking Update   & Load.  b.  For the changes to take effect, click COMMIT and then REBOOT.   6.2.4.2 Upgrade Configuration via TFTP  To upgrade the configuration files by using TFTP Server, do the following:  1.  Navigate to MANAGEMENT > File Management > Update Configuration > TFTP.                   Figure 6-8 Upgrade Binary Configuration via TFTP  2.  You can update the device with two configuration files: Binary and Text Based. To update the device with Binary   Configuration file, select Binary Config.  •  Enter the TFTP server IP Address in the Server IP Address box.   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  155
    Management    •  Enter the name of the Binary file (including the file extension) that has to be downloaded onto the device in the File Name box. 3.  To update the device with Text Based Configuration files, select Text Based Config. •  Enter the TFTP server IP Address in the Server IP Address box. •  Enter the name of the Text Based file (including the file extension) that has to be downloaded onto the device in the File Name box.                   Figure 6-9 Upgrade Text Based Configuration via TFTP  4.  If you are updating the device with Binary Configuration file then click Update and then reboot the device or   alternatively click Update & Reboot.  5.  If you are updating the device with Text Based Configuration file then  • Click Update to copy the text config file onto the device and then click Load for updating the device with text config file. •  Alternatively, you can perform both update and load operation in one single step, by clicking Update & Load. •  For the changes to take effect, click COMMIT and then REBOOT.   : It is recommended not to navigate away from the upgrade screen, while the update is in progress.    6.2.5 Retrieve From Device  The Retrieve From Device tab allows you to retrieve logs and config files from the device either through HTTP or TFTP.   6.2.5.1 Retrieve from Device via HTTP  To retrieve files from the device by using HTTP, do the following:  1.  Navigate to MANAGEMENT > File Management > Retrieve from Device > HTTP.              Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  156
    Management                  Figure 6-10 Retrieve Files via HTTP  2.  Select the type of file that you want to retrieve from the device from the File Type drop down box. The files may vary    depending on your device.  3.  Click Retrieve. Based on the selected file, the following Download screen appears.                  Figure 6-11 Download Screen  4.  Right-click the Download link and select Save Target As or Save Link As to save the file to the desired location.   6.2.5.2 TFTP Retrieve  To retrieve files from the device by using TFTP, do the following:  1.  Navigate to MANAGEMENT > File Management > Retrieve from Device > TFTP.                     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  157
    Management                    Figure 6-12 Retrieve Files via TFTP  2.  Enter the TFTP server IP Address in the Server IP Address box.  3.  Enter the name of the file (including the file extension) that has to be retrieved from the device, in the File Name box.  4.  Select the file type that you want to retrieve from the device, from the File Type drop down box.  5.  Click Retrieve. The retrieved file can be found in the TFTP Server folder.      • When the device is running with default factory settings, there is no Binary Configuration file present and hence it cannot be retrieved.  • Similarly, the Text Based Template Configuration file does not exist if it is not generated from the CLI.  • You can retrieve Event Logs only when they are generated by the device.                                      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  158
    Management   6.3 Services  The Services tab lets you configure the HTTP/HTTPS, Telnet/SSH and SNMP interface parameters.  6.3.1 HTTP/HTTPS  To configure HTTP/HTTPS interface parameters, navigate to MANAGEMENT > Services > HTTP / HTTPS.                    Figure 6-13 HTTP/HTTPS  Tabulated below is the table which explains HTTP/HTTPS parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s).   Parameter Description Admin Password  By default, the Administrator password to access HTTP/HTTPS interface is public. For security reasons, it is recommended to change the default password. The password should be alphanumeric with minimum of 6 and maximum of 32 characters.   : The following special characters are not allowed in the password:  - = \ “ ‘ ? / space  Monitor Password   The Administrator user has the privilege to change the Monitor user password. By default,  the Monitor user password to access HTTP/HTTPS interface is public. For security reasons it is recommended to change the default password. The password should be alphanumeric with minimum of 6 and maximum of 32 characters.   : The following special characters are not allowed in the password:  - = \ “ ‘ ? / space  HTTP  By default, a user can manage the device through Web Interface. To prevent access to the device through Web Interface, select Disable. HTTP Port  Represents the HTTP port to manage the device using Web Interface. By default, the HTTP port is 80.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  159
    Management    Parameter Description HTTPS  By default, a user can manage the device through Web Interface over secure socket Layer (HTTPS). To prevent access to the device through HTTPS, select Disable.    : The password configuration for HTTPS is same as configured for HTTP.    After configuring the required parameters, click OK, COMMIT and then REBOOT.  6.3.2 Telnet/SSH  To configure Telnet/SSH interface parameters, navigate to MANAGEMENT > Services > Telnet / SSH.                          Figure 6-14 Telnet/SSH  Tabulated below is the table which explains Telnet/SSH parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Admin Password  By default, the Administrator password to access Telnet/SSH interface is public. For security reasons, it is recommended to change the default password. The password should be alphanumeric with minimum of 6 and maximum of 32 characters.   : The following special characters are not allowed in the password:  - = \ “ ‘ ? / space       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  160
    Management    Monitor Password   The Administrator user has the privilege to change the Monitor user password. By default,  the Monitor user password to access Telnet/SSH interface is public. For security reasons it is recommended to change the default password. The password should be alphanumeric with minimum of 6 and maximum of 32 characters.   : The following special characters are not allowed in the password:  - = \ “ ‘ ? / space  Telnet  By default, a user can manage the device through Telnet. To prevent access to the device through Telnet, select Disable. Telnet Port  Represents the port to manage the device using Telnet. By default, the Telnet port is 23. Telnet Sessions  The number of Telnet sessions which controls the number of active Telnet connections. A user is restricted to configure a maximum of 3 Telnet sessions. By default, the number of Telnet sessions allowed is 2.  SSH  By default, a user can manage the device through SSH. To prevent access to the device through SSH, select Disable.  SSH Port  Represents the port to manage the device using Secure Shell. By default, the Secure Shell port is 22.  SSH Sessions  The number of SSH sessions which controls the number of active SSH connections. A user is restricted to configure a maximum of 3 SSH sessions. By default, the number of SSH sessions allowed is 1.   : The total number of CLI sessions allowed is 3, so the sum of Telnet and SSH  sessions cannot be more than 3. For example, if you configure the number of  Telnet sessions as 2, then the number of SSH sessions can only be a value 0 or 1.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK, COMMIT and then REBOOT.                                    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  161
    Management   6.3.3 SNMP  To configure SNMP interface parameters, navigate to MANAGEMENT > Services > SNMP.                           Figure 6-15 SNMPv1-v2c                                           Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  162
    Management                                Figure 6-16 SNMPv3  Tabulated below is the table which explains SNMP parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description SNMP  By default, the user has the access to manage the device through SNMP Interface. To prevent access to the device through SNMP, select Disable.    : Any change in the SNMP status will affect the Network Management System  access.  Version  Allows you to configure the SNMP version. The supported SNMP versions are v1-v2c and v3. By default, the SNMP version is v1-v2c.  SNMP v1-v2c Specific Parameters  Read Password  Represents the read only community string used in SNMP Protocol. It is sent along with  each SNMP GET / WALK / GETNEXT / GETBULK request to allow or deny access to the  device. This password should be same as read password set at the NMS or MIB browser.  The default password is “public”. The password should be of minimum 6 and maximum  32 characters.   : The following special characters are not allowed in the password:  - = \ “ ‘ ? / space    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  163
    Management    Read/Write Password   Represents the read-write community string used in SNMP Protocol. It is sent along with  each SNMP GET / WALK / GETNEXT / SET request to allow or deny access to the device.  This password should be same as read-write password set at the NMS or MIB browser. The  default password is “public”. The password should be of minimum 6 and maximum 32  characters.   : The following special characters are not allowed in the password:  - = \ “ ‘ ? / space  SNMP v3 Specific Parameters  Security level  The supported security levels for the device are AuthNoPriv and AuthPriv. Select AuthNoPriv for Extensible Authentication or AuthPriv for both Authentication and Privacy (Encryption).  Priv Protocol  Applicable only when the Security Level is set to AuthPriv.  Represents the type of privacy (or encryption) protocol. Select the encryption standard as either AES-128 (Advanced Encryption Standard) or DES (Data Encryption Standard). The default Priv Protocol is AES-128.   : The following special characters are not allowed in the password:  - = \ “ ‘ ? / space  Priv Password  Applicable only when the Security Level is set to AuthPriv.  Represents the pass key for the selected Privacy protocol. The default password is  public123. The password should be of minimum 8 and maximum 32 characters.   : The following special characters are not allowed in the password:  - = \ “ ‘ ? / space  Auth Protocol  Represents the type of Authentication protocol. Select the encryption standard as either SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm) or MD5 (Message-Digest algorithm). The default Auth Protocol is SHA.  Auth Password   Represents the pass key for the selected Authentication protocol. The default password is  public123. The password should be of minimum 8 and maximum 32 characters.   After configuring the required parameters, click OK, COMMIT and then REBOOT.   6.3.3.1 SNMP Trap Host Table  The SNMP Trap Host table allows you to add a maximum of 5 Trap server’s IP address to which the SNMP traps will be delivered. By default, the SNMP traps are delivered to 169.254.128.133.    : The default SNMP Trap Host Table entry cannot be deleted.    To add entries to the Trap Host Table, click Add in the Services screen. The SNMP Trap Host Table Add Row screen  appears:    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  164
    Management                Figure 6-17 Add Entries to SNMP Host Table  Configure the following parameters:  •  IP Address: Type the IP address of the Trap server to which SNMP traps will be delivered. •  Password: Type the password to authenticate the Trap Server. The following special characters are not allowed in the password: - = \ “ ‘ ? /  space   : Applicable only to SNMP v1-v2c.    •  Comment: Type comments, if any. •  Entry Status: Select the entry status as either Enable or Disable. If enabled, the device will send SNMP traps to the authenticated Trap Server. •  After configuring the required parameters, click Add and then COMMIT.  6.3.3.2 Edit SNMP Trap Host Table  Edit the desired SNMP Trap Host Table entries and click OK, COMMIT and then REBOOT.   6.3.4 Logs  The device supports two types of log mechanisms:  1.  Event Log: Based on the configured event log priority, all the log messages are logged and used for any analysis. This    log messages remain until they are cleared by the user.  2.  Syslog: They are similar to Event logs except that they are cleared on device reboot.    To configure Event log and Syslog priority, navigate to MANAGEMENT > Services > Logs. The following screen appears:                     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  165
    Management                       Figure 6-18 Logs  •  Event Log Priority: By default, the priority is set to Notice. You can configure the event log priority as one of the following: - Emergency  - Alert  - Critical  - Error  - Warning  - Notice  - Info  - Debug  Please note that the priorities are listed in the order of their severity, where Emergency takes the highest severity and Debug the lowest. When the log priority is configured as high, all the logs with low priority are also logged. For example, if Event Log Priority is set to Notice, then the device will log all logs with priorities Notice, Warning, Error, Critical, Alert and Emergency.   •  Syslog Status: By default, Syslog Status is enabled and default priority is Critical. If desired, you can choose to disable. •  Syslog Priority: Configuration is same as Event Log Priority. •  After configuring the required parameters, click OK and then COMMIT.  6.3.4.1 Configure a Remote Syslog host To forward the syslog messages to a remote syslog host, do the following: 1.  Click Add in the Syslog Host Table screen. The Syslog Host Table Add Row screen appears:            Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  166
    Management              Figure 6-19 Syslog Host Table Add Row  2.  IP Address: Enter the IP address of the Syslog host.  3.  Host Port: Represents the port on which the Syslog host listens to the log messages sent by the device. The default    port is 514.   : The user must configure the correct port number on which the Syslog host is running. Choice of port number must be in line with the standards for port number assignments defined by Internet Assigned Numbers  Authority (IANA).  4.  Comments: Types comments, if any.  5.  Entry Status: By default, the configured Syslog host is enabled on the device. To delete the configured Syslog host,   click Delete. To disable an entry in the Syslog Host Table, click Disable.  6.  Click Add.  7.  Click OK and then COMMIT.   6.4 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)  Proxim’s point-to-multipoint and point-to-point devices are furnished with Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Client software that enables to synchronize device’s time with the network time servers.  The SNTP Client when enabled on the device(s), sends an NTP (Network Time Protocol) request to the configured time servers. Upon receiving the NTP response, it decodes the response and sets the received date and time on the device after adjusting the time zone and day light saving.  In case, the time servers are not available, then users also have the option to manually set the date and time on the device.  To synchronize device’s time with time servers or manually set the time, navigate to MANAGEMENT > SNTP. The SNTP screen appears:                         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  167
    Management                         Figure 6-20 Time Synchronization  Tabulated below is the table which explains SNTP parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description Enable SNTP Status  Select this parameter to enable SNTP Client on the device. If enabled, the SNTP Client tries to synchronize the device’s time with the configured time servers.  By default, the SNTP status is disabled. Primary Server IP  Enter the host name or the IP address of the primary SNTP time server. The SNTP Client Address/Domain  tries to synchronize device’s time with the configured primary server time. Name : If host name is configured, instead of IP address then make sure that DNS server IP is configured on the device. Secondary Server IP  Enter the host name or the IP address of the secondary SNTP time server. If the primary Address/Domain  server is not reachable, then SNTP client tries to synchronize device’s time with the Name secondary server time.  : If the SNTP Client is not able to sychronize the time with both the servers  (primary and secondary), then it tries to synchronize again after every one  minute.  Time Zone  Configure the time zone from the available list. This configured time zone is considered before setting the time, received from the time servers, on the device. Day Light Saving Time  Configure the Day Light Saving time from the available list. This configured Day Light Saving time is considered before setting the time, received from the time servers, on the device.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  168
    Management    Parameter Description ReSync Interval  Set ReSync time interval ranging from 0 to 1440 minutes. Once the time is synchronized, the SNTP Client tries to resynchronize with the time servers after every set time interval.  Sync Status  Specifies the SNTP Client sync status when it tries to ReSync again with the time servers. The status is as follows:  •  Disabled: The SNTP client will not synchronize the time with the time servers and    displays the status as Disabled.  •  Synchronizing: The SNTP client is in the process of synchronzing time with the time   servers.  •  Synchronized: The SNTP client has synchronized time with the time servers.  Current Date/Time  Displays the current date and time.  If SNTP is enabled, it displays the time the device received from the SNTP server. If SNTP is not enabled, then it displays the time manually set by the user. Manual Time  If SNTP Client is disabled on the device or the time servers are not available on the Configuration  network, then the user can manually set the time. Enter the time manually in the format: MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM:SS.   :  • Manual time configuration is not retained across reboots. After every reboot the user has to set the time again.  • With manual time configuration, the device may lag behind the actual time  over a period of time. So, it is recommended to periodically check and adjust  the time.   To save the configured parameters, click Ok and then COMMIT.   6.5 Access Control  The Access Control tab enables you to control the device management access through specified host(s). You can specify a maximum of 5 hosts to control device management access.  To configure management access control parameters, navigate to MANAGEMENT > Access Control. The Management Access Control screen appears:                         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  169
    Management                   Figure 6-21 Management Access Control  By default, the Management Access Control feature is disabled on the device. To enable, select Enable from the Access Table Status box and click OK. Reboot the device, for the changes to take effect.    : Only when the Access Table Status is enabled, you can add host(s) to the Management Access Control Table.   6.5.0.1 Add Host(s) to Management Access Control Table  To add a host to the Management Access Control Table, do the following:  1.  Click Add in the Management Access Control screen. The Management Access Table Add Row screen appears:           Figure 6-22 Management Access Table Add Row  2.  IP Address: Type the IP address of the host that controls the device management access.  3.  Entry Status: By default, the entry status is enabled meaning which the specified host can control the device   management access. Edit the status to Disable, if you do not want the host to control the device management   access.  4.  Click Add.   6.5.0.2 Edit Management Access Control Table Entries  Edit the desired host entries and click OK, COMMIT and then REBOOT.   6.6 Reset to Factory  The Reset to Factory tab allows you to reset the device to its factory default state. When this operation is performed, the device will reboot automatically and comes up with default configurations.  To reset the device to its factory defaults, navigate to MANAGEMENT > Reset To Factory. The Factory Reset screen appears:    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  170
    Management           Figure 6-23 Reset to Factory Defaults  Click OK, if you wish to proceed with factory reset, else click Cancel.   6.7 Convert QB to MP  The Convert QB to MP tab lets you convert a QB to SU so that the converted device can connect to a BSU and operate as a  regular SU.  This feature is applicable only to,  •  Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA which converts to a Tsunami® MP-8100-SUA, and •  Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR which converts to a Tsunami® MP-8150-SUR You can convert a QB to SU mode by using two methods: •  Method 1: Web Interface •  Method 2: Load a SU config file (retrieved from another SU) onto the QB device and then reboot.   : Even after conversion from QB to MP, the device description still shows as QB.    To convert a QB to SU using Web Interface, do the following:  1.  Navigate to MANAGEMENT > Convert QB to MP. The Convert QB to MP screen appears:          Figure 6-24 Convert QB to MP  2.  Click OK.  3.  Reboot the device for the changes to take effect.    :  • A QB after converting to SU will function in SU mode only. It will accept only MP firmware for upgrade.  • The version of the firmware being upgraded to should be 2.4.0 or later. If earlier version of the firmware is loaded, the device will reset to factory default upon initialization and operate in QB mode.  • When upgrading a converted device from Bootloader, it must be done using a QB image, as the device is licensed as  QB.  • The conversion of the device from QB to SU requires a reboot.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  171
    Management    • In case of Method 1 conversion, QB mode configuration will be deleted.  • Reset to factory defaults, always results in the device initializing in QB mode.                                                                                 Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  172
7      Monitor    This chapter contains information on how to monitor the device by using Web interface. It contains information on the following: •  Interface Statistics •  WORP Statistics •  Active VLAN •  Bridge •  Network Layer •  RADIUS (BSU or End Point A only) •  IGMP •  DHCP •  Logs •  Tools •  SNMP v3 Statistics  7.1 Interface Statistics  Interface Statistics allows you to monitor the status and performance of the Ethernet and Wireless interfaces of the device.  7.1.1 Ethernet Statistics  To view the Ethernet interface statistics, click MONITOR > Interface Statistics. The Interface Statistics screen appears:                        Figure 7-1 Ethernet Interface Statistics       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  173
    Monitor   To view Ethernet statistics, click Ethernet 1 or Ethernet 2 depending on the Ethernet interfaces supported by your device. Tabulated below is the table which explains the parameters displayed in the Ethernet Statistics screen:   Parameter Description MTU  Specifies the largest size of the data packet received or sent on the Ethernet interface. MAC Address  Specifies the MAC address at the Ethernet protocol layer. Operational Status  Specifies the current operational state of the Ethernet interface. In Octets  Specifies the total number of octets received on the Ethernet interface. In Unicast Packets  Specifies the number of subnetwork- unicast packets delivered to the higher level protocol. In Non-unicast Packets  Specifies the number of non-unicast subnetwork packets delivered to the higher level protocol. In Errors  Specifies the number of inbound packets that contained errors and are restricted from being delivered. Out Octets  Specifies the total number of octets transmitted out of the Ethernet interface. Out Unicast Packets  Specifies the total number of packets requested by the higher level protocol and then, transmitted to the non-unicast address.  Out Discards  Specifies the number of error-free outbound packets chosen to be discarded to prevent them from being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. Out Errors  Specifies the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.  To view the updated Ethernet statistics, click Refresh. To delete the Ethernet statistics, click Clear.                                 Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  174
    Monitor   7.1.2 Wireless Statistics  To view the Wireless interface statistics, click MONITOR > Interface Statistics > Wireless1.                                   Figure 7-2 Wireless Interface Statistics  In addition to the parameters displayed for the Ethernet interface(s), the following parameters are displayed for the wireless  interface.   Parameter Description Retunes  Specifies the number of times the radio is retuned for better performance of the device. SNR Statistics  SNR Statistics represents the signal strength with regard to the noise at the antenna ports.  Antenna  Specifies the antenna ports available for the product. Please note that the antenna ports vary depending on the product. Status  Specifies the configuration status of the antenna ports. ON indicates that antenna port is enabled and OFF indicates that antenna port is disabled. Control  Specifies the SNR value of the packet received at the selected channel frequency.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  175
    Monitor    Parameter Description Extension  This parameter is applicable only to the 40 MHz modes, that is, 40 PLUS and 40 Minus. It specifies the SNR value of the packet received on the extension channel (20MHz). Rx Error Details Decrypt Errors  This parameter is applicable only if security is enabled. It indicates the number of received packets that failed to decrypt. CRC Errors  Specifies the number of received packets with invalid CRC. PHY Errors  Specifies the total Rx PHY Errors. It generally indicates the interference in the wireless medium.  To view the updated Wireless statistics, click Refresh.  To delete the Wireless statistics, click Clear.  7.1.3 PPPoE Statistics    : Applicable only to a SU in Routing mode.    To view PPPoE interface statistics, navigate to MONITOR > Interface Statistics > PPPoE > PPP Interface Stats.                       Figure 7-3 PPPoE Interface Statistics  The PPPoE interface parameters are same as the Ethernet interface parameters. Please note that if a link is not established between a PPPoE client and server, then the device displays the following message.           Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  176
    Monitor              Figure 7-4 PPPoE Server - No Link Established  To view the updated PPPoE interface statistics, click Refresh. Please note that for every 4 seconds, the interface statistics gets  refreshed.  To view the PPPoE connection status such as the number of attempts made to start a session between PPPoE client and server, and the number of attempts failed to establish a connection, click PPPoE Connection Stats.              Figure 7-5 PPPoE Connection Statistics  To view updated connection statistics, click Refresh.  To restart the session between the PPPoE client and server, click Restart PPPoE Session. On successfully re-establishing a  session, the IP address of the wireless interface will be assigned again by the PPPoE server, if Address Type is set to PPPoE-ipcp.  To clear the existing connection statistics, click Clear.  7.1.4 IP Tunnels    : Applicable only in Routing Mode.   To view IP Tunnels interface statistics, click MONITOR > Interface Statistics > IP Tunnels. The following IP Tunnel Interface Statistics screen appears:            Figure 7-6 IP Tunnels Interface Statistics     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  177
    Monitor    Tabulated below is an explanation to each of these parameters:   Parameter Description Name  Specifies the tunnel interface name. Alias  Specifies a supplementary tunnel interface name. Maximum  Specifies the largest size packet or frame that can be sent over the tunnel interface. Transmission Unit  (MTU)  The MTU of the tunnel interface is derived from the underlying interface: For IP-IP tunnel interface: MTU = Underlying interface MTU - 20 bytes (IP header) For IP-GRE interface: MTU = Underlying interface MTU - 24 bytes (IP header + gre protocol) Operational Status  The Operational Status indicates only the tunnel interface status. The status can be either UP or DOWN.  : For the tunnel to function correctly both ends should be configured correctly.    Details  Provides a more detailed statistics about the tunnel interface. To view the detailed statistics, click                           Figure 7-7 Detailed IP Tunnels Interface Statistics  The detailed tunnel interface parameters are similar to the Ethernet Interface Statistics. Please refer to Ethernet Statistics.         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  178
    Monitor   7.2 WORP Statistics  7.2.1 General Statistics  WORP General Statistics provides general statistics about the WORP.  To view General Statistics, navigate to MONITOR > WORP Statistics > Interface 1 > General Statistics. The following WORP General Statistics screen appears:                       Figure 7-8 WORP General Statistics  Tabulated below is an explanation to each of these parameters:   Parameter Description Interface Type  Specifies the type of radio interface. WORP Protocol  Specifies the version of the WORP Protocol used. This information is useful to the customer Version  support team for debugging purpose only. WORP Data Messages Specifies the sent or received data frames through wireless interface. Poll Data  Refers to the number of polls with data messages sent or received. Poll No Data  Refers to the number of polls with no data messages sent or received. Reply Data  Refers to the number of poll replies with data messages sent or received. Reply More Data  Refers to the number of poll replies with more data messages sent or received. Reply No Data  Refers to the number of poll replies with no data messages sent or received. Poll No Replies  Refers to the number of times poll messages were sent by a BSU/End Point A but no reply was received by SU/End Point B. This parameter is valid only on BSU.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  179
    Monitor    Parameter Description Data Transmission Statistics Specifies the number of transmissions occurred through the interface. Send Success  Refers to the number of data messages sent and acknowledged by the peer successfully. Send Retries  Refers to the number of data messages that are re-transmitted and acknowledged by the peer successfully. Send Failures  Refers to the number of data messages that are not acknowledged by the peer even after the specified number of retransmissions. Receive Success  Refers to the number of data messages received and acknowledged successfully. Receive Retries  Refers to the number of successfully received re-transmitted data messages. Receive Failures  Refers to the number of data messages that were not received successfully. Registration Details Specifies the status of the entire registration process. Remote Partners  Refers to the number of remote partners. For a SU/End Point A/End Point B, the number of remote partners is always zero or one. Announcements  Refers to the number of Announcement messages sent or received on WORP interface. Request For Service  Refers to the number of requests for service messages sent or received. Registration Requests  Refers to the number of registration request messages sent or received on WORP interface. Registration Rejects  Refers to the number of registration reject messages sent or received on WORP interface. Authentication  Refers to the number of authentication request messages sent or received on WORP Requests interface. Authentication  Refers to the number of authentication confirm messages sent or received on WORP Confirms interface. Registration Attempts  Refers to the number of times a registration attempt has been initiated. Registration  Refers to the number of registration attempts that are not yet completed. Incompletes Registration Timeouts  Refers to the number of times the registration procedure timed out. Registration Last  Refers to the reason for the last registration getting aborted or failed. Reason    : For better results, the Send Failure or Send Retrieve must be low in comparison to Send Success. The same applies for Receive Retries or Receive Failure.   Click Clear to delete existing general statistics.  Click Refresh to view updated WORP general statistics.         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  180
    Monitor   7.2.2 SU / End Point B Link Statistics    : SU Link Statistics is applicable only to a BSU, and End Point B Link Statistics is applicable only to a End Point A device.   SU Link statistics provides information about the SUs connected to a BSU. Similarly, End Point B Link Statistics provides information about an End Point B currently connected to an End Point A device.  To view link statistics, navigate to MONITOR > WORP Statistics > Interface 1 > SU / End Point B Link Statistics.               Figure 7-9 An Example - SU Link Statistics  Tabulated below is an explanation to each of these parameters:   Parameter Description SU Name/  Represents the name of the SU/End Point B connected to a BSU/End Point A respectively. End Point B Name MAC Address  Represents the MAC address of the SU/End Point B connected to a BSU/End Point A respectively. Local Tx Rate (Mbps)  Represents the data transmission rate at the local (current device) end. Remote Tx Rate  Represents the data transmission rate at the remote (peer) end. (Mbps) Local Antenna Port  Indicates the status of the antenna ports at the local end. The following symbols indicate Info  the status of the antenna ports.  Indicates the antenna port is disabled.  Indicates the antenna port is enabled and signal is present.   Local Signal (dBm)  Represents the signal level with which the device at the local end receives frames from the device at the remote end, through wireless medium. Local Noise (dBm)  Represents the noise measured at the local end antenna ports. Local SNR (dB)  Represents the SNR measured by the receiver at the local end and is based on the Local Signal and Local Noise.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  181
    Monitor    Parameter Description Remote Antenna Port  Indicates the status of the remote end antenna ports. The antenna ports status is same as Info  explained in Local Antenna Port Info. Remote Signal (dBm)  Represents the signal level with which the device at the remote end receives frames, through wireless medium. Remote Noise (dBm)  Represents the noise measured at the remote end antenna ports. Remote SNR (dB)  Represents the SNR measured by the receiver at the remote end and is based on the Remote Signal and Remote Noise. Current Tx Power  Applicable only when ATPC is enabled on the device. (dBm)  •  TPC: Displays the TPC value currently applied by the device to adjust the transmit power radiated by the radio antenna.  •  EIRP: Displays the current EIRP that a radio antenna radiates (after applying the TPC).  •  Power: Displays the current transmit power radiated by the radio (after applying the   TPC).   Click Refresh to view updated link statistics.  To view detailed SU/End Point B Link statistics, click Details icon  in the SU/End Point B Link Statistics screen. The following screen appears depending on your device:                                                 Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  182
    Monitor                                                   Figure 7-10 SU Detailed Statistics  The detailed page displays Remote SNR information, that is, the Minimum Required SNR and the Maximum Optimal SNR value for a given data rate or modulation, to achieve optimal throughput.  To disconnect a SU/End Point B from BSU/End Point A respectively, click Disconnect. To view updated detailed statistics, click Refresh.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  183
    Monitor   To view local SNR table, click Click here for Local SNR-Table on the upper-right of SU/End Point B Link Statistics screen (Refer An Example - SU Link Statistics). The following screen appears depending on your device:                                         Figure 7-11 Local SNR Information  These configured values are used by ATPC and DDRS to derive TPC and data rate for optimal throughput.  7.2.3 BSU/End Point A Link Statistics    : BSU Link Statistics is applicable only to a SU, and End Point A Link Statistics is applicable only to an End Point B device.   BSU Link statistics provides information about the BSU to which SUs are connected. Similarly, End Point A Link Statistics provides information about an End Point A currently linked to an End Point B device.        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  184
    Monitor                  Figure 7-12 An Example - BSU Link Statistics  The link statistics are similar to SU / End Point B Link Statistics.   7.2.4 QoS Statistics (BSU or End Point A Only)    : This parameter is applicable only to BSU or End Point A radio modes.    To view QoS Statistics, navigate to MONITOR > WORP Statistics > Interface 1 > QoS Statistics. The following QoS Summary screen appears.                        Figure 7-13 QoS Summary  This screen shows the total, minimum and maximum bandwidth allocated per BSU/End Point A, and the minimum and maximum bandwidth allocated for each SU/End Point B registered with the BSU/End Point A respectively.          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  185
    Monitor   7.3 Active VLAN    : This parameter is applicable only to a device in SU mode.    The Active VLAN page enables you to identify the VLAN Configuration mode applied on a device in SU mode.  To view active VLAN applied on the device in SU mode, navigate to MONITOR > Active VLAN. The Active VLAN page  appears:                 Figure 7-14 Active VLAN  The Active VLAN Config parameter helps you to identify the current VLAN configuration applied on the device in SU mode.  •  Local: VLAN configuration is done locally from the device. •  Remote: VLAN configuration is done through RADIUS Server. This page also displays the VLAN parameters and their values that are configured either locally or remotely.    To view active VLAN Ethernet Configuration, navigate to MONITOR > Active VLAN > Ethernet. The Active VLAN Ethernet Configuration page appears:                 Figure 7-15 Active VLAN Ethernet Configuration  This page displays the VLAN Ethernet parameters and their values that are configured either locally or remotely.      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  186
    Monitor     : Please note that the number of Ethernets vary depending on the device.   7.4 Bridge  7.4.1 Bridge Statistics  The Bridge Statistics allows you to monitor the statistics of the Bridge.  To view the Bridge Statistics, navigate to MONITOR > Bridge > Bridge Statistics. The following Bridge Statistics screen  appears:                        Figure 7-16 Bridge Statistics  The following table lists the parameters and their description:Parameter Description Description  This parameter provides a description about the bridge. MTU  Represents the largest size of the data packet sent on the bridge. MAC Address  Represents the MAC address at the bridge protocol layer. Operational Status  Represents the current operational status of the bridge: UP (ready to pass packets) or DOWN (not ready to pass packets).  In Octets  Represents the total number of octets received on the bridge interface, including the framing characters. In Unicast Packets  Represents the number of unicast subnetwork packets delivered to the higher level protocol. In Non-unicast Packets  Represents the number of non-unicast subnetwork packets delivered to the higher level protocol.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  187
    Monitor    Parameter Description In Errors  Represents the number of inbound packets with errors and that are restricted from being delivered.  Out Octets  Represents the total number of octets transmitted out of the bridge, including the framing characters. Out Unicast Packets  Represents the total number of packets requested by higher-level protocols to be transmitted out of the bridge interface to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent. Out Discards  Represents the number of error-free outbound packets which are discarded to prevent them from being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.  Out Errors  Represents the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.  To view updated Bridge statistics, click Refresh.  To clear the Bridge statistics, click Clear.  7.4.2 Learn Table  Learn Table allows you to view all the MAC addresses that the device has learnt on all of its interfaces.  To view Learn Table statistics, navigate to MONITOR > Bridge > Learn Table. The Learn Table screen appears.               Figure 7-17  Learn Table  The Learn Table displays the MAC address of the learnt device, the bridge port number, aging timer for each device learnt on an interface, and the local (DUT's local interfaces)/remote (learned entries through bridging) status of the learnt device.  To view updated learn table statistics, click Refresh.  To clear learn table statistics, click Clear.                Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  188
    Monitor   7.5 Network Layer  7.5.1 Routing Table  Routing table displays all the active routes of the network. These can be either static or dynamic (obtained through RIP). For every route created in the network, the details of that particular link or route will get updated in this table.  To view the Routing Table, navigate to MONITOR > Network Layer > Routing Table. The Routing Table screen appears:           Figure 7-18 Routing Table   7.5.2 IP ARP  Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical address on the network. The IP ARP table is used to maintain a correlation between each IP address and its corresponding MAC address. ARP provides the protocol rules for making this correlation and providing address conversion in both directions.  To view IP Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics, navigate to MONITOR > Network Layer > IP ARP. The IP ARP Table screen appears.              Figure 7-19 IP ARP Table  The IP ARP Table contains the following information:  •  Index: Represents the interface type. •  MAC Address: Represents the MAC address of a node on the network. •  Net Address: This parameter represents the corresponding IP address of a node on the network. •  Type: This parameter represents the type of mapping, that is, Dynamic or Static. To view updated IP ARP entries, click Refresh. To clear the IP ARP entries, click Clear.           Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  189
    Monitor   7.5.3 ICMP Statistics  The ICMP Statistics attributes enable you to monitor the message traffic that is received and transmitted by the device.  To view ICMP statistics, navigate to MONITOR > Network Layer > ICMP Statistics. The ICMP Statistics screen appears.                        Figure 7-20 ICMP Statistics  The following table lists the ICMP Statistics parameters and their description:Parameter Description In Msgs or Out Msgs  Represents the number of ICMP messages that are received/transmitted by the device. In Errors or Out Errors  Represents the number of ICMP messages that are received/transmitted by the device but determined as having ICMP-specific errors such as Bad ICMP checksums, bad length and so on. In Dest Unreachs or  Represents the number of ICMP destination unreachable messages that are Out Dest Unreachs  received/transmitted by the device. In Time Excds or Out  Represents the number of ICMP time exceeded messages that are received/transmitted by Time Excds  the device. In Parm Probs or Out  Represents the number of ICMP parameter problem messages that are Parm Probs  received/transmitted by the device. In Srec Quenchs or  Represents the number of ICMP source quench messages that are received/transmitted by Out Srec Quenchs  the device. In Redirects or Out  Represents the rate at which the ICMP redirect messages are received/transmitted by the Redirects device. In Echos  Represents the rate at which the ICMP echo messages are received. In EchoReps or Out  Represents the rate at which the ICMP echo reply messages are received/transmitted by EchoReps the device.   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  190
    Monitor    Parameter Description In Timestamps or Out  Represents the rate at which the ICMP timestamp (request) messages are Timestamps  received/transmitted by the device. In Timestamps Reps or  Represents the rate at which the ICMP timestamp reply messages are received/transmitted Out Timestamps Reps  by the device. In Addr Masks or Out  Represents the number of ICMP address mask request messages that are Addr Masks  received/transmitted by the device. In Addr Mask Reps or  Represents the number of ICMP address mask reply messages that are Out Addr Mask Reps  received/transmitted by the device.  To view updated ICMP Statistics, click Refresh.  7.5.4 RIP Database  The RIP Database screen contains routes (Routing Information Protocol updates) learnt from other routers.                          Figure 7-21 RIP Database                     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  191
    Monitor   7.6 RADIUS (BSU or End Point A only)    : RADIUS is applicable only to a BSU or an End Point A device.  7.6.1 Authentication Statistics  Authentication Statistics provides information on RADIUS Authentication for both the primary and backup servers for each RADIUS server profile.  To view Authentication statistics, navigate to MONITOR > RADIUS > Authentication Statistics. The RADIUS Client Authentication Statistics screen appears:                      Figure 7-22 Radius Client Authentication Statistics  The following table lists the Authentication Statistics parameters and their description:Parameter Description Round Trip Time  Represents the round trip time for messages exchanged between RADIUS client and authentication server since the client startup.  Reqs  Represents the number of RADIUS access request messages transmitted from the RADIUS client to the authentication server since client startup.  RTMS  This parameter represents the number of times the RADIUS access requests are being transmitted to the server from the device since the client startup.  Accepts  Represents the number of RADIUS access accept messages received by the device since client startup.  Rejects  Represents the number of RADIUS access reject messages received by the device since client startup. Resp  Represents the number of RADIUS response packets received by the device since client startup.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  192
    Monitor    Parameter Description Mal Resp  Represents the number of malformed RADIUS access response messages received by the device since client startup.  Bad Auths  Represents the number of malformed RADIUS access response messages containing invalid authenticators received by the device since client startup.  Time Outs  Represents the total number of timeouts for RADIUS access request messages since client startup. UnKnown Types  This parameter specifies the number of messages with unknown RADIUS message code since client startup. Packets Dropped  Represents the number of RADIUS packets dropped by the device.  To view updated RADIUS Client Authentication statistics, click Refresh.  7.7 IGMP   : Applicable in Bridge mode only.    To view IGMP statistics, navigate to MONITOR > IGMP > IGMP Snooping Stats. The Ethernet or Wireless Multicast List screen appears:                 Figure 7-23 Ethernet1 Multicast List   7.7.1 Ethernet or Wireless Multicast List  The Multicast List table contains the IGMP Multicast IP and Multicast MAC address details for the Ethernet or Wireless interfaces. The following table lists the parameters and their description.   Parameter Description Group IP  Represents the IP address of the multicast group for Ethernet or Wireless interface learned by IGMP snooping. MAC Address  Represents the MAC address of the multicast group for Ethernet or Wireless interface learned by IGMP snooping.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  193
    Monitor    Parameter Description Time Elapsed  Represents the time elapsed since the multicast entry has been created for the Ethernet or Wireless interface.   To view updated IGMP statistics, click Refresh.  7.7.2 Router Port List  The Router Port List displays the list of ports on which multicast routers are attached.  To view Router Port List, navigate to MONITOR > IGMP > Router Port List. The Router Port List screen appears:             Figure 7-24 Router Port List  The following table lists the parameters and their description.   Parameter Description Port Number  Represents the port number on which multicast router is attached (on which IGMP Query has been received).  Time Elapsed  Represents the time elapsed since the port is marked as the router port.  To view updated Router Port list, click Refresh.   7.8 DHCP  DHCP Leases file stores the DHCP client database that the DHCP Server has served. The information stored includes the duration of the lease, for which the IP address has been assigned, the start and end dates for the lease, and the MAC address of the network interface card of the DHCP client.  To view DHCP Leases, navigate to MONITOR > DHCP > Leases.                     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  194
    Monitor                    Figure 7-25 DHCP Leases   7.9 Logs  7.9.1 Event Log  The Event Log keeps track of events that occur during the operation of the device. It displays the event occurring time, event type, and the name of the error or the error message. Based on the priority (the log priority is set under MANAGEMENT > Services > Logs), the event details are logged and can be used for any future reference or troubleshooting.  To view the Event Log, navigate to MONITOR > Logs > Event Log. The following Event Log screen appears:                            Figure 7-26 Event Logs     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  195
    Monitor   To hide the event logs, click Hide Event Log.  To clear the event logs, click Clear Event Log.  To view updated event logs, click Refresh.    : The recent event logs are stored in the flash memory.  7.9.2 Syslog  System log messages are generated by the system by sending requests at various instances to the system log server. To view System Logs, navigate to MONITOR > Logs > Syslog. The Syslog screen appears.                            Figure 7-27 System Log  To clear Syslog information, click Clear Syslog.  To hide Syslog information, click Hide Syslog.  To refresh Syslog messages, click Refresh.  7.9.3 Debug Log  Debug Log helps you to debug issues related to important features of the device. Currently, this feature supports only DDRS and DFS. This feature helps the engineering team to get valuable information from the field to analyze the issues and provide faster solution. This feature should be used only in consultation with the Proxim Customer Support team. Once logging is enabled, the Debug Log file can be retrieved via HTTP or TFTP.  To enable Debug Log, navigate to MONITOR > Logs > Debug Log. The Debug Log screen appears:       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  196
    Monitor                     Figure 7-28 Debug Log  Features: Select the appropriate features to be logged. The available features are Select All, DDRS Level 1, DDRS Level 2, DDRS Level 3 and DFS.  File Status: This parameter displays the current size of the Debug Log file. After selecting the DDRS level, click OK.  To delete the Debug Log, click Clear Log.  To get the updated status of the Debug Log File, Click Refresh.  7.9.4 Temperature Log    : Temperature Log are not applicable to Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE, Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE and Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-12/50 devices.   Temperature Log feature reports and logs the internal temperature of the device. When the internal temperature value reaches the minimum threshold value of -40ºC or the maximum threshold temperature of 60ºC, the internal temperature is logged and an SNMP trap is sent (At 5 Degrees before each limit, the device issues a warning trap). These threshold temperature values may be reconfigured but the values cannot exceed beyond the default values.   : A recording interval from one to sixty minutes with 5-minute increments can be selected. If we configure the logging interval as “0”, temperature logs will be disabled.   To view and configure threshold values, and the logging interval, navigate to MONITOR > Logs > Temperature Log.  The threshold values of temperature are configured in Centigrade (Celsius) scale. The Temperature Log screen displays the Current Device Temperature in Celsius, along with High Temperature and Low Temperature Threshold values and Temperature Logging Interval. The temperature log can have a maximum size of 65 Kb; and once the limit is reached, only the last 576 logs are available. (Log storage is up to six days with the refresh time of 5 minutes).            Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  197
    Monitor                Figure 7-29 Temperature Log  After configuring the parameters, click OK.  To view the Temperature Log, click Show Temp Log.  To delete all the Temperature Logs, click Clear Temp Log.  Click Refresh, to get the updated Temperature Log.   7.10 Tools  7.10.1 Wireless Site Survey    : Applicable only to a device in SU or End Point B mode.   Wireless Site Survey is done by the SU or End Point B only. This feature scans all the available channels according to the current Channel Bandwidth, and collects information about all BSUs or Endpoint A configured with the same network name as SUs or End Point B.                   Figure 7-30 Wireless Site Survey - SU Mode   To initialize the survey process, click Start. This process list the details of all the available BSUs or End Point A. To stop the site survey process, click Stop. Click Refresh, to get the updated Wireless Site Survey.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  198
    Monitor   7.10.2 Scan Tool  With Scan Tool, you can scan all the devices available in your network.  To scan the devices, navigate to MONITOR > Tools > Scan Tool. The Scan Tool screen appears.             Figure 7-31 Scanned Devices  Click Scan to scan and refresh the devices on the network.  7.10.3 sFlow®  Proxim’s point-to-multipoint and point-to-point devices support sFlow® technology, developed by InMon Corporation. The sFlow® technology provides the ability to measure network traffic on all interfaces simultaneously by collecting, storing, and analyzing traffic data.  Depicted below is the sFlow architecture that consists of a sFlow Agent and a sFlow Receiver.                     Figure 7-32 sFlow Architecture - An Example with a BSU and SUs  The sFlow Agent, which is running on devices, captures traffic information received on all the Ethernet interfaces, and sends sampled packets to the sFlow Receiver for analysis.  The sampling mechanism used to sample data are as follows:          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  199
    Monitor    •   Packet Flow Sampling: In this sampling, the data packets received on the ethernet interface of the device are  sampled based on a counter. With each packet received, the counter is decremented. When the counter reaches zero,  the packet is packaged and sent to the sFlow Receiver for analysis. These packets are referred to as Packet Flow  Samples.  •   Counter Polling Sampling: In this sampling, the sFlow Agent sends counters periodically to the sFlow Receiver based    on the set polling interval. If polling interval is set to 5 seconds then the sFlow Agent sends counters to sFlow Receiver    every 5 seconds. These packets are referred to as Counter Polling Samples.  The Packet Flow Samples and Counter Polling Samples are collectively sent to the sFlow Receiver as sFlow Datagrams.   It is possible to enable either or both types of sampling.  sFlow Sampling effects the system performance and hence care must be taken in configuring the sFlow parameters. To configure sFlow, navigate to MONITOR > Tools > sFlow. The following sFlow® screen appears:                           Figure 7-33 sFLOW  This screen displays the following information about the sFlow Agent:  •   Version: The version displayed is 1.3;Proxim Wireless Corp.; v6.4. The version comprises the following information:  1.  sFlow MIB Version: Indicates the agent’s MIB version. The MIB specifies how the agent extracts and bundles    sampled data, and the sFlow receiver must support the agent’s MIB. The sFlow MIB version is 1.3. so the sFlow    Receiver’s version must also be at least 1.3.  2.  Organization: Specifies the organization implementing sFlow Agent functionality on the device, that is, Proxim   Wireless Corp.  3.  Revision: Specifies the sFlow Agent version, that is, v6.4.  •  Address Type: Specifies the protocol version for IP addresses. •  Agent Address: Specifies the sFlow Agent’s IP address.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  200
    Monitor    7.10.3.1 sFlow Receiver Configuration  The Receiver Configuration page allows you to configure sFlow Receiver(s), which receives samples from all agents on the network, combines and analyzes the samples to produce a report of network activity.  To configure sFlow Receiver, navigate to MONITOR > Tools > sFlow and select Receiver Configuration tab.   Tabulated below is the table which explains sFlow parameters and the method to configure the configurable parameter(s):   Parameter Description S.No.  Represents the Receiver index number. Please note that the number of indexes depends on the ethernet interfaces your device supports. Owner  Enter a string, which uniquely identifies the sFlow Receiver. Time Out  Enter a value ranging from 30 to 31536000 seconds (365 days) in the Time Out box.  The sFlow Agent sends sampled packets to the specified sFlow Receiver till it reaches zero. At zero, all the Receiver parameters are set to default values.  Max Datagram Size   Enter the maximum size of a sFlow datagram (in bytes), which the Receiver can receive, in  the Max Datagram Size box. By default, the maximum datagram size is set to 1400 bytes. It can range from 200 to 1400 bytes.  Address Type  The address type supported by sFlow Receiver is ipv4, which is by default selected.  : Only IPv4 is currently supported.   Receiver Address  Enter the sFlow Receiver’s IP address in the Receiver Address box. Receiver Port  By default, the sFlow Receiver listens to the sFlow datagrams on 6343 port. To change the port, enter a valid port ranging from 0 to 65535 in the Receiver Port box.  Datagram Version  The sFlow datagram version used is 5.  Click Apply, to save the sFlow Receiver configuration parameters.  Once the Receiver configurations are done, either Packet Flow sampling or Counter Polling Sampling or both can be started.    :   • Enabling sampling effects the system performance and hence care should be taken in setting the right values for Timeout and Max Datagram Size.  • When the Owner string is cleared, the Flow Sampling and Counter Polling stops.   7.10.3.2 Sampling Configuration  To configure and start packet flow sampling, do the following:  1.  Navigate to MONITOR > Tools > sFlow and select Sampling Configuration tab.         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  201
    Monitor                             Figure 7-34 sFlow Sampling Configuration  2.  From the Receiver Index drop-down box, select the receiver index number associated with the sFlow Receiver to    which the sFlow Agent should send the sFlow Datagrams.    : If device has two ethernet interfaces, then configure different Receiver indexes for each of the interface.   3.  Type a value in the Packet Sampling Rate box. This value determines the number of packets the sFlow Agent    samples from the total number of packets passing through the ethernet interface of the device.  4.  Type a value in the Maximum Header Size box, to set the amount of data (in bytes) to be included in the sFlow    datagram. The sFlow Agent samples the specified number of bytes. For example, if you set the Maximum Header Size    to 100, the sFlow Agent places the first 100 bytes of every sampled frame in the datagram. The value should match    the size of the frame and packet header so that the entire header is forwarded. The default size is 128 bytes. The    header size can range from 20 to 256 bytes.  5.  Next, click Apply to start packet flow sampling. Once it starts, the Time Out parameter (see sFlow Receiver   Configuration) keeps decrementing till it reaches a zero value. On reaching zero, the corresponding Receiver and    Sampling values are set to default values.    :   • Enabling sFlow packet sampling effects the system performance, and hence care must be taken when choosing the right value for Packet Sampling Rate and Maximum Header Size.  • Receiver Index for packet Sampling table and Counter Polling table should be same for each Ethernet interface.          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  202
    Monitor    7.10.3.3 Counter Polling Configuration  To configure and start Counter Polling sampling, do the following:  1.  Navigate to MONITOR > Tools > sFlow and select Counter Polling Configuration tab.                           Figure 7-35 Counter Polling Configuration  2.  From the Receiver Index drop-down box, choose the receiver index number associated with the sFlow Receiver to    which the sFlow Agent sends the counters.   : If Packet Flow Sampling is already configured and running, then you should configure the Receiver index same as configured in the Packet Flow Sampling for each ethernet interface.   3.  Set the polling interval by typing a value in the Interval box. Lets say, the polling interval is set to 30 seconds. So for    every 30 seconds, the counters are collected and send to the sFlow Receiver. The valid range for polling interval is 0 to   231 - 1 seconds.  4.  Next, click Apply to start Counter Polling Sampling. Once it starts, the Time Out parameter (see sFlow Receiver   Configuration) keeps decrementing till it reaches a zero value. On reaching zero, the corresponding Receiver and    Counter Polling values are set to default values.      • Enabling sFlow counter sampling effects the system performance, and hence care must be taken when choosing the right value sampling interval.  • Receiver Index for packet Sampling table and Counter Polling table should be same for each Ethernet interface.  • If a sampling starts and there is already another sampling running then we consider the time out value of the current/already running sampling.     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  203
    Monitor   7.10.4 Console Commands  The Console Commands feature helps Proxim’s Technical Support team to debug field issues.   7.11 SNMP v3 Statistics  SNMP v3 statistics can be viewed only when SNMPv3 feature is enabled on the device. See SNMP.  To view the SNMPv3 Statistics, navigate to MONITOR > SNMPV3 Statistics. The following SNMP v3 Statistics screen  appears:                 Figure 7-36 SNMP v3 Statistics  The following table lists the SNMP v3 parameters and their description:Parameter Description Unsupported Sec  This parameter specifies the total number of packets received by the SNMP engine, which Levels  were dropped because they requested a security level that was unknown to the SNMP engine or otherwise unavailable.  Not In Time Windows   This parameter specifies the total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which  were dropped because they appeared outside of the authoritative SNMP engine's window.  Unknown User Names   This parameter specifies the total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which  were dropped because they correspond to an unknown user to the SNMP engine.  Unknown Engine IDs  This parameter specifies the total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they correspond an SNMP Engine ID that was unknown to the SNMP engine. Wrong Digests  This parameter specifies the total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they did not contain the expected digest value. Decryption Errors  This parameter specifies the total number of packets received by the SNMP engine which were dropped because they could not be decrypted.             Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  204
8      Troubleshooting    This chapter helps you to address the problems that might arise while using our device. If the procedures discussed in this  chapter  does  not  provide  a  solution,  or  the  solution  does  not  solve  your  problem,  check  our  support  site  at  http://support.proxim.com  which stores all resolved problems in its solution database. Alternatively, you can post a question  on the support site, to a technical person who will reply to your email.  Before you start troubleshooting, check the details in the product documentation available on the support site. For details about RADIUS, TFTP, Terminal and Telnet programs, and Web Browsers, refer to their appropriate documentation.  In some cases, rebooting the device solves the problem. If nothing else helps, consider a Soft Reset to Factory Defaults or a Forced Reload. The Forced Reload option requires you to download a new firmware onto the device.  This chapter provides information on the following:  •  PoE Injector •  Connectivity Issues •  Surge or Lightning Issues (For Connectorized devices) •  Setup and Configuration Issues •  Application Specific Troubleshooting •  Wireless Link Issues •  Wired (Ethernet) Interface Validation •  Wireless Interface Validation •  Recovery Procedures •  Spectrum Analyzer •  Miscellaneous                                       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  205
    Troubleshooting   8.1 PoE Injector   Problem Solution The Device Does Not  •  Make sure that you are using a standard UTP Work  - Category 5e/6 cable in case of MP-8100-BSU, MP-8100-SUA, MP-8150-SUR, MP-8160-BSU, MP-8160-SUA, QB-8100-EPA and QB-8150-EPR devices - Category 5 cable in case of MP-8150-CPE, MP-8160-CPE, QB-8150-EPR-12/50 •  Try a different port on the same PoE Injector hub (remember to move the input port accordingly) - if it works then there is a problem in the previous RJ45 port or a bad RJ45 port connection. •  Try to connect the device to a different PoE Injector hub. •  Try using a different Ethernet cable - if it works, there is probably a fault in the cable or its connection. •  Check the power plug and hub. •  If the ethernet link goes down, check the cable, cable type, switch and hub. There is No Data Link  •  Verify that the indicator on the device port is “ON.” •  Verify that the Ethernet cable from PoE Injector hub to the Ethernet port of the device is properly connected.  •   Make sure that you are using a standard UTP  - Category 5e/6 cable in case of MP-8100-BSU, MP-8100-SUA, MP-8150-SUR,    MP-8160-BSU, MP-8160-SUA, QB-8100-EPA and QB-8150-EPR devices  - Category 5 cable in case of MP-8150-CPE, MP-8160-CPE,   QB-8150-EPR-12/50 devices  •   The length of the cable from the Ethernet port of the device to the PoE should be    less than 100 meters (approximately 325 feet).  •  Try to connect a different device to the same port on the PoE Injector hub - if it works and a link is established then there is probably a fault in the data link of the device. •  Try to re-connect the cable to a different output port (remember to move the input port accordingly) - if it works then there is a fault probably in the output or input port of the PoE Injector hub or a bad RJ45 connection. Overload Indications  •  Connect the device to a PoE Injector. •  Ensure that there is no short over on any of the connected cables. •  Move the device into a different output port (remember to move the input port accordingly) - if it works then there is a fault probably in the previous RJ45 port or bad RJ45 port connection.   8.2 Connectivity Issues  Connectivity issues include any problem that prevents from powering or connecting to the device.   Problem Solution Does Not Boot - No  •  Make sure your power source is ON. LED Activity  •  Make sure all the cables to the device are connected properly.    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  206
    Troubleshooting    Problem Solution Ethernet Link Does  Check the Ethernet LED Not Work  •  Solid Green: The Ethernet link is up. •  Blinking Green: The Ethernet link is down. Serial Link Does Not  •  Double-check the physical network connections. Work  •  Make sure your PC terminal program (such as HyperTerminal) is active and configured to the following values:  - Com Port: (COM1, COM2 and so on depending on your computer);  - Baud rate: 115200; Data bits: 8; Stop bits: 1; Flow Control: None; Parity:   None;  - Line Feeds with Carriage Returns  • (In HyperTerminal select: File > Properties > Settings > ASCII Setup > Send Line Ends with Line Feeds)  : Not applicable to Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE as it does not support serial interface.    Cannot Access the  •  Open a command prompt window and type the Ping command along with the IP Web Interface  address of the device. For example, ping 10.0.0.1. If the device does not respond, check if you have the correct IP address. If the device responds then it means the Ethernet connection is working properly.  •  Ensure that you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 (or later) or Mozilla Firefox  3.0 (or later).  •  Ensure that you are not using a proxy server for the network connection with your   Web browser.  •  Ensure that you have not exceeded the maximum number of Web Interfaces or CLI   sessions.  •  Double-check the physical network connections. Use a well-known device to ensure    the network connection is functioning properly.  •  Troubleshoot the network infrastructure (check switches, routers, and so on).    : At any point of time, if the device is unable to connect to your network, reset the device by unplugging and plugging the cables from the PoE.   8.3 Surge or Lightning Issues (For Connectorized devices)   Problem Solution Surge or Lighting  In case of any lightning or surge occurrence, check for the conditions specified below: Problem  •  Check the RF signals by referring to RSSI statistics and if the signal strength has been lowered considerably, replace the Surge Arrestor. •  Unscrew the N-Type connector at the top and visually inspect the Surge Arrestor for electrical burns. If any, replace it.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  207
    Troubleshooting   8.4 Setup and Configuration Issues   Problem Solution Device Reboots  One of the reason for the device to reboot continuously is that the radio card is not Continuously  properly placed in the mini-PCI slot. When you power on the device and you do not see the “WIRELESS NETWORK1    PASSED” in the POST message in the Serial Console, please contact Proxim’s support site at http://support.proxim.com. Lost Telnet or SNMP  Perform Soft Reset to Factory Defaults procedure. This procedure resets system and Password  network parameters, but does not affect the image of the device. The default HTTP, Telnet, and SNMP username is admin and password is public. Device Responds  If the device takes a long time to respond, it could mean that: Slowly  •  No DHCP server is available. •  The IP address of the device is already in use. Verify that the IP address is assigned only to the device you are using. Do this by switching off the device and then  pinging the IP address. If there is a response to the ping, another device in the  network is using the same IP address. If the device uses a static IP address, switching to DHCP mode could solve this problem.  •  The network traffic is more. Incorrect Device IP  •  The default IP address assignment mode is Static and the default IP address of the Address  device is 169.254.128.132. •  If the IP address assignment mode is set to Dynamic, then the DHCP Server will assign an IP address automatically to the device. If the DHCP server is not available on your network, then the fall back IP address (169.254.128.132) of the device is used. •  Use ScanTool, to find the current IP address of the device. Once you have the current IP address, use Web Interface or CLI Interface to change the device IP settings, if necessary. •  If you are using static IP address assignment, and cannot access the device over Ethernet, refer to Initializing the IP Address using CLI. • Perform Soft Reset to Factory Defaults procedure. This will reset the device to static mode. HTTP Interface or  •  Make sure you are using a compatible browser: Telnet Does Not Work  - Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later - Mozilla Firefox 3.0 or later •  Make sure you have the correct IP address of the device. Enter the device IP address in the address bar of the browser, for example http://169.254.128.132. • When the Enter Network Password window appears, enter the User Name and and Password. The default HTTP username is admin and password is public. •  Use CLI, to check the IP Access Table which can restrict access to Telnet and HTTP. Telnet CLI Does Not  •  Make sure you have the correct IP address. Enter the device IP address in the Telnet Work  connection dialog, from a DOS prompt: C:\> telnet <Device IP Address> •  Use HTTP, to check the IP Access Table which can restrict access to Telnet and HTTP. •  Enable Telnet in Vista or Windows 7 as it is by default disabled.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  208
    Troubleshooting    Problem Solution TFTP Server Does Not  •  The TFTP server is not properly configured and running Work  •  The IP address of the TFTP server is invalid •  The upload or download directory is not correctly set •  The file name is not correct Changes in Web Interface Do Not Take  Effect 1. Restart your Web browser. 2. Log on to the device again and make changes. 3. Reboot the device. 4. Click Commit for the changes to take effect. 5. Wait until the device reboots before accessing the device again.   8.5 Application Specific Troubleshooting   Problem Solution RADIUS  If RADIUS Authentication is enabled on the device, then make sure that your network’s Authentication Server  RADIUS servers are operational. Otherwise, clients will not be able to log onto the device. Services unavailable  There are several reasons for the authentication server‘s services to be unavailable. To make it available,  •  Make sure you have the proper RADIUS authentication server information setup  configured on the device. Check the RADIUS Authentication Server’s Shared Secret  and Destination Port number (default is 1812; for RADIUS Accounting, the default is  1813).  •  Make sure the RADIUS authentication server RAS setup matches the device.  TFTP Server  If a TFTP server is not configured and running, you will not be able to download and upload images and configuration files to or from the device. Remember that the TFTP  server need not be local, as long as you have a valid TFTP IP address. Note that you do not need a TFTP server running unless you want to transfer files to or from the device.   After the TFTP server is installed:  •  Check to see that TFTP is configured to point to the directory containing the device Image. •  Make sure you have the proper TFTP server IP Address, the proper device image file name, and that the TFTP server is connected. •  Make sure the TFTP server is configured to both Transmit and Receive files (on the TFTP server’s Security tab), with no automatic shutdown or time-out  (on the Auto Close tab).                Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  209
    Troubleshooting   8.6 Wireless Link Issues  Tabulated below are the possible reasons for a wireless link not getting established and the relevant observations.   Reason(s) Observation Mismatch in network  •  The Wireless Interface Statistics (In Octets, In Non-Unicast Packets) are incremented name  in BSU/End Point A and SU/End Point B. •  The WORP counters are not affected. •  The remote device is not listed in the Site Survey. Incorrect or invalid  •  The Wireless Interface Statistics (In Octets, In Non-Unicast Packets) are incremented configured BSU/End  in SU/End Point B. Point A name  •  The WORP counters are not affected. •  The remote device is not listed in the Site Survey. Mismatch in network  •  The Wireless Interface Statistics (In Octets, In Non-Unicast Packets) are incremented secret  in BSU/End Point A and SU/End Point B. •  The WORP counters are incremented (Req for Serv, Reg Req, Auth Req, Reg Attempts, Reg LastReason: Incorrect Parameter) on both ends. Encryption set to No  •  The Wireless Interface Statistics (In Octets, In Non-Unicast Packets) are incremented Encryption in  in BSU/End Point A; No decrypt errors are observed in SU/End Point B. BSU/End Point A and  •  In SU/End Point B, the WORP counters (Announcements, Req for Serv, Reg Attempts, AES Encryption in  Reg incomplete, Reg timeout, Reg Last Reason: Timeout) are incremented. In SU/End Point B  BSU/End Point A, no WORP counters are incremented except announcements. •  The remote device is not listed in the Site Survey. Encryption set to AES  •  The Wireless Statistics counters and WORP counters are not incremented in SU/End Encryption in  Point B. BSU/End Point A and  •  The remote device is not listed in the Site Survey. No Encryption in SU/End Point B Encryption set to AES  •  The Wireless Interface Statistics (In Octets, In Non-Unicast Packets) are incremented Encryption in both  only in SU/End Point B. BSU/End Point A and  •  The remote device is not listed in the Site Survey. SU/End Point B. A mismatch in Encryption key BSU exceeds the  •  The Wireless Interface Statistics (In Octets, In Non-Unicast Packets) are incremented maximum SU limit  in SU/End Point B but fails to authenticate. •  The WORP counters (Announcements, Req for Serv, Reg Attempts, Reg Incompletes, Reg Timeouts, Reg Last Reason: Timeout) are incremented in SU/End Point B. •  The remote device is listed in the Site Survey.               Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  210
    Troubleshooting   8.7 Wired (Ethernet) Interface Validation   Problem Solution Wired (Ethernet)  Run iperf commands Interface Validation  •  Use iperf commands with -w option as 202k. The throughput is expected to be equal in both directions and should be comparable from laptop to laptop or desktop to desktop performance  If the above throughput value is not in the expected range,  •  Check speed and duplex settings between the device and Personal Computer or    switch or router connected  •  Make sure the connection established is of same speed and full duplex is as expected    (10 or 100 or 1000)  •  With auto negotiation, if you notice this issue, then try manually setting the speed    and duplex  •  Update the Ethernet driver in the Personal Computer to the latest one                                                          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  211
    Troubleshooting   8.8 Wireless Interface Validation   Problem Solution Wireless Interface  Run iperf commands (You can run Embedded iperf commands only through Telnet.) Validation  •  iperf -s -w 202k (command for iperf server) •  Iperf -c ipaddress -w 202k -t time Period -I <intermediateResultInterval> -P <4 or    6> (command to run iperf client)  - Ipaddress -> of the SU/End Point B or BSU/End Point A device where the iperf    server is running  - P -> No of pairs (Streams)  •  Use -d option to run bidirectional throughput  •  Use -r option to run unidirectional throughput one after another without changing    the server and SU ends  If the expected throughput is not achieved, then check the following:  •  Antenna Alignment - Note whether the antenna ports are balanced - SNR/RSSI provided for Local    and Remote in the BSU/SU Link Statistics page or by using “aad” command  - Signal difference of <=5 dBm is considered as balanced and recommended  - If the chains are not balanced, then look at the alignment and connectors of    RF cables, used between antenna and device  - If in RMA (Returned from Customer), check the RF cable to radio port   connectivity  - Avoid nearby metal surfaces, if you are using Omni antenna  •  Data Streams - Select “Single” stream instead of “Dual” stream mode  - DDRS - with single stream data rate or with Auto mode  Dual stream data rates can be used only when the signal in both antenna ports is  balanced  •   Antenna Port Selection  - For MP81x0-BSU/SU or QB81x0 devices, make sure you are either enabling all    antenna ports for 3*3 MIMO or using A1 and A3 antenna ports for 2*2   MIMO mode  - For MP8160-BSU/SU use A1 and A2 antenna ports for 2*2 MIMO  - For using single stream, it is mandatory to select antenna port A1  - Enabling all antenna port will not cause any issue even if it is not in use.  •  Bad Channel - Check for CRC errors, PHY errors, WORP Retries and WORP Failures in  Monitor Interface Statistics page. If this count increments steadily (Refreshing the web page is required) then  •  Either change the channel and check for a better channel  •  Use Wi-Spy or similar tool and check the environment for better channel  •  Data Rate Issues - Ensure same data rates are selected if you are using fixed data rate between BSU/SU and End Point A/End Point B to have predictable throughput and link - Alternative, use DDRS with Auto mode enabled   Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  212
    Troubleshooting     Problem Solution Wireless Interface  •  Performance and Stability Issues Validation  - Check the distance between two co-locating devices. The distance between two co-locating devices should be minimum 3 meters, in order to achieve good throughput and maintain link stability. The operating channels should maintain 5MHz spacing if managed by a single administrator.  - When DDRS is disabled, check the Minimum Required SNR for the current    data rate by navigating to MONITOR --> WORP Statistics --> Interface 1  --> Link Statistics Page --> Click here for Local SNR-Table. If the current SNR is not meeting the minimum required SNR criteria for the current data rate, then accordingly reduce the data rate.  - If SNR is more than the maximum optimal SNR limit (MONITOR --> WORP   Statistics --> Interface 1 --> Link Statistics Page --> Click here for Local   SNR-Table) then it causes radio receiver saturation thus impacting the    performance of the link. To overcome this situation, set the TPC appropriately    or enable ATPC to adjust the signal level automatically. Also, enabling DDRS    can help in choosing right data rate automatically.   8.9 Recovery Procedures  8.9.1 Soft Reset to Factory Defaults  Use this procedure to reset the network configuration values, including the Password, IP Address, and Subnet Mask. This procedure resets configuration settings, but does not change the current device Image.  To use this procedure, in the web interface navigate to MANAGEMENT > Reset to Factory.  The device gets the default IP address (169.254.128.132). You can change the IP address using Web Interface or CLI. If you do not have access to the HTTP or CLI interfaces, use Hard Reset to Factory Defaults procedure.  8.9.2 Hard Reset to Factory Defaults  If you cannot access the device or you have lost its password, you can reset the device to its factory default settings by using the Reload button available on the PoE injector. With Reload, the configuration settings are deleted from the device and the device reboots, using a factory default configuration.    :  • Please note that if the PoE supplied with the Product Package is not equipped with the Reload functionality then  you will have to use a PoE which is equipped with the Reload functionality to reset the device to its factory defaults.  • You need to use a pin or the end of a paperclip to press the Reload button.    : If you hold the Reload button for longer than 10 seconds, the device may go into Forced Reload mode, which erases the device embedded software. This software must be reloaded through an ethernet connection with access to a TFTP Server. See Forced Reload for instructions.          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  213
    Troubleshooting   8.9.3 Forced Reload  With Forced Reload, you bring the device into bootloader mode which erases the embedded software. Use this procedure only as a last option if the device does not boot, and the Soft and Hard to Factory Defaults procedure does not help.   : With Forced Reload, the embedded software in the device will be erased. You will need to reload the software before the device is operational.  The device will try to load the image using the default factory configuration parameters. If this fails, then it will enter either CLI mode or ScanTool mode as per the user’s choice, with a message on the serial console “Starting ScanTool interface, press any key to enter CLI 5”. Follow one of the procedures below to load a new image to the device:  •  Download a New Image Using Proxim’s ScanTool •  Download a New Image Using the Bootloader CLI As the CLI requires a physical connection to the device serial port, Proxim recommends you to use the ScanTool option.    : You cannot download a new image using Bootloader CLI onto Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE as it does not provide serial interface support to the user.   8.9.3.1 Download a New Image Using Proxim’s ScanTool  To download the device image, you will need an Ethernet connection to the computer on which the TFTP server resides and to a computer that is running ScanTool (this is either two separate computers connected to the same network or a single computer running both programs).  ScanTool automatically detects the device that does not have a valid software image. The TFTP Server and Image File Name parameters are enabled in the ScanTool’s Change screen so that you can download a new image to the device. (These fields are disabled, if ScanTool does not detect a software image problem). See Initialization.  Preparing to Download the Device Image  Before starting the download process, you need to know the device IP Address, Subnet Mask, the TFTP Server IP Address, and the Image file name. Make sure the TFTP server is running and properly configured to point to the folder containing the image to be downloaded.  Download Procedure  Follow these steps to download a software image to the device by using ScanTool:  1.  Download the latest software from http://support.proxim.com.  2.  Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP server.  3.  Launch Proxim’s ScanTool.  4.  Highlight the entry for the device that you want to update and click Change.  5.  Set IP Address Type to Static.    : You need to assign static IP information temporarily to the device since its DHCP client functionality is not available when no image is installed on the device.  6.  Enter an unused IP address that is valid on your network in the IP Address field. You may need to contact your    Network Administrator to get this address.  7.  Enter the network’s Subnet Mask.       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  214
    Troubleshooting   8.  Enter the network’s Gateway IP Address, if necessary. You may need to contact your Network Administrator to get    this address. You need to enter the default gateway address (169.254.128.133) only if the device and the TFTP server    are separated by a router.  9.  By default, the IP address of the TFTP server is provided.  10. By default, the image file name is provided.  11. Click OK. The device will reboot and the download starts automatically.  12. Click OK when prompted to return to the Scan List screen after the device has been updated successfully.  13. Click Cancel to close the ScanTool.  When the download process is complete, start configuring the device.   8.9.3.2 Download a New Image Using the Bootloader CLI  To download the new device image, you will need an Ethernet connection to the computer on which the TFTP server resides. This can be any computer on the LAN or connected to the device with an Ethernet cable.  You must also connect the device to a computer with a standard serial cable and use a terminal client. From the terminal, enter the CLI commands to set the IP address of the device and to download the device image.  Preparing to Download the device image  Before starting, you need to know the device IP Address, Subnet Mask, the TFTP Server IP Address, and the device image file  name. Make sure the TFTP server is running and configured to point to the default directory containing the image to be  downloaded.  Download Procedure  1.  Download the latest software from http://support.proxim.com. 2.  Copy the latest software updates to your TFTP server’s default directory. 3.  Connect the device serial port to your computer’s serial port. 4.  Open your terminal emulator program and set the following connection properties: •  Com Port: COM1, COM2 and so on, depending on your computer •  Baud Rate: 115200 •  Data Bits: 8 •  Stop Bits: 1 •  Flow Control: None •  Parity: None 5.   Under File > Properties > Settings > ASCII Setup, enable the Send line ends with line feeds option.    Terminal Emulator program sends a line return at the end of each line of code.  The terminal display shows Power On Self Tests (POST) activity. After approximately 30 seconds, a message indicates: Starting ScanTool interface, press any key to enter CLI 5”. After this message appears, press any key. Now the bootloader prompt appears as below:  Bootloader=>  6.   Enter the following commands:  Bootloader=> show (to view configuration parameters and values) Bootloader=> set ipaddr <Access Point IP Address>  Bootloader=> set serverip <TFTP Server IP Address>  Bootloader=> set filename <Device Image File Name, including file extension> Bootloader=> set gatewayip <Gateway Ip Address>  Bootloader=>  set netmask <Network Mask> Bootloader=> set ipaddrtype static  Bootloader=> show (to confirm your new settings)     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  215
    Troubleshooting    Bootloader=> reboot   Example:  Bootloader=> show  Bootloader=> set ipaddr 169.254.128.132  Bootloader=> set serverip 169.254.128.133  Bootloader=> set filename image_proxim.sei  Bootloader=> set gatewayip 169.254.128.133  Bootloader=> set netmask 255.255.255.0  Bootloader=> set ipaddrtype static  Bootloader=> show  Bootloader=> reboot   The device will reboot and then download the image file. When the download process is complete, configure the  device.  8.9.4 Setting IP Address using Serial Port  If the ScanTool fails to scan the device and users knows the login credentials then you can set the IP address for the device using serial port.   8.9.4.1 Hardware and Software Requirements  •  Standard serial (RS-232) cable • ASCII Terminal software  8.9.4.2 Attach the Serial Port Cable  1.  Connect one end of the serial cable to the device and the other end to a serial port on your computer.  2.  Power on the computer and the device.   8.9.4.3 Initializing the IP Address using CLI  After connecting the cable to the serial port, you can use the CLI to communicate with the device. CLI supports the  most-generic terminal emulation programs. In addition, many web sites offer shareware or commercial terminal programs  that you can download. Once the IP address has been assigned, you can use the HTTP interface or the Telnet to complete the  configuration.  Follow these steps to assign an IP address to the device:  1.  Open your terminal emulation program and set the following connection properties:  •  Com Port: COM1, COM2, and so on depending on your computer •  Baud Rate: 115200 •  Data Bits: 8 •  Stop Bits: 1 •  Flow Control: None •  Parity: None  The terminal display shows Power On Self Tests (POST) activity, and then displays the software version. It prompts you to enter the CLI username and password. The commands to enter the username and password are as follows:  #################################################|  # +-++-++-++-++-++-+  # |p||r||o||x||i||m|  # +-++-++-++-++-++-+  # Version: 1.0.0 B208100    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  216
    Troubleshooting    # Architecture: MIPS 7660  # Creation: 10-Aug-2009 (IST) 08:16:14 PM  #################################################| Username: admin  Password:   This process may take up to 90 seconds.   2.   Enter the CLI Username and password. By default username is admin and password is public. The terminal displays a    welcome message and then the CLI Prompt. Enter ‘show ip’ as shown below:  System Name> show ip   The following Ethernet IP information is displayed:   // Ethernet IP CONFIGURATION //  INDEX 1  IP Address : 10.0.0.1  Mask : 255.255.255.0  Address Type : static   // IP Gateway Configuration //  Gateway IP Address : 169.254.128.1   3.  Change the IP address and other network values using the following CLI commands (use your own IP address and Subnet mask). System Name> enable  System Name# configure  System Name(config)#network  System Name(config-net)# ip  System Name(config-net-ip)# ethernet-ip-table  System Name(config-net-ip-etherip)# rowedit 1 ipaddress <ipaddress>  System Name(config-net-ip-etherip)# rowedit 1 mask <subnet mask>  System Name(config-net-ip-etherip)# rowedit 1 address-type <Address Type> System Name(config-net-ip)# default-gateway <IP Gateway>  System Name(config-net-ip-etherip)#exit  System Name(config-net-ip)#exit  System Name(config-net)#exit  System Name(config)# commit 1  System Name(config)# reboot 1   4.   After the device reboots, verify the new IP address by reconnecting to the CLI. Alternatively, you can ping the device    from a network computer to confirm that the new IP address has taken effect.  When a proper IP address is set, use HTTP interface or Telnet to configure the rest of the operating parameters of the  device.   8.10 Spectrum Analyzer  The ultimate way to discover whether there is a source of interference is to use a Spectrum Analyzer. Usually, the antenna is connected to the analyzer when measuring. By turning the antenna 360°, one can check the direction of the interference. The analyzer will also display the frequencies and the level of signal is detected. Proxim recommends performing the test at various locations to find the most ideal location for the equipment.        Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  217
    Troubleshooting   8.10.1 Avoiding Interference  When a source of interference is identified and when the level and frequencies are known, the next step is to avoid the interference. Some of the following actions can be tried:  •  Change the channel to a frequency that has no or least interference. •  Try changing the antenna polarization. •   A small beam antenna looks only in one particular direction. Because of the higher gain of such an antenna, lowering    the output power or adding extra attenuation might be required to stay legal. This solution cannot help when the    source of interference is right behind the remote site.  •   Adjusting the antenna angle/height can help to reduce the interference.  Move the antennas to a different location on the premises. This causes the devices to look from a different angle, causing a  different pattern in the reception of the signals. Use obstructions such as buildings, when possible, to shield from the  interference.  8.10.2 Conclusion  A spectrum analyzer can be a great help to identify whether interference might be causing link problems on the device.  Before checking for interference, the link should be verified by testing in an isolated environment, to make sure that the  hardware works and your configurations are correct. The path analysis, cabling and antennas should be checked as well.  Statistics in the web interface under Monitor indicates if there is a link, if the link is healthy, and a continuous test can be done  using the Link Test.  •   Base Announces should increase continuously.  •   Registration Requests and Authentication Requests should be divisible by 3. WORP is designed in a way that each    registration sequence starts with 3 identical requests. It is not a problem if, once in a while, one of those requests is    missing. Missing requests frequently is to be avoided.  •   Monitor / Per Station (Information per connected remote partner): Check that the received signal level (RSL) is the    same on both sides. This should be the case if output power is the same. Two different RSLs indicate a broken    transmitter or receiver. A significant difference between Local Noise and Remote Noise could indicate a source of    interference near the site with the highest noise. Normally, noise is about -80 dBm at 36 Mbps. This number can vary    from situation to situation, of course, also in a healthy environment.  •   Monitor / Link Test (Information used by Administrators for on-the-spot checking): Check the received signal level (RSL)    and noise level. Compare the RSL with the values from path analysis. If the figures differ significantly from the values    recorded at the Per Station window, check for environment conditions that change over time.   8.11 Miscellaneous  8.11.1 Unable to Retrieve Event Logs through HTTPS  If using Internet Explorer 7 and are not able to retrieve event logs through HTTPS, do the following:  1.  Open Internet Explorer  2.  Navigate to Tool > Internet Options > Advanced  3.  Go to Security and uncheck/unselect Do not save encrypted pages to disk  Alternatively, use Mozilla Firefox 3.5 or later.             Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  218
A      Feature Applicability   Tabulated below are the feature(s) applicable to the respective devices:                                                                           Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  219
B      Parameters Requiring Reboot   Tabulated below are the device parameters that require reboot for the changes to take effect:   Parameter(s)  Web Page(s)  Applicable Device Mode* System Configuration  Radio Mode  BASIC CONFIGURATION  All ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> System Frequency Domain  BASIC CONFIGURATION  All ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> System Network Mode  ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> System  All Frequency Filter  ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> System  All Lower Edge  Frequency Filter  ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> System  All Upper Edge  IP Configuration (Bridge Mode) Ethernet Default Gateway IP Address DNS  BASIC CONFIGURATION ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> Network -> IP Configuration All All   All  IP Configuration (Routing Mode) Ethernet Wireless Wireless (With PPPoE) Default Gateway IP Address DNS (Primary and  Secondary Address) All All SU Mode BASIC CONFIGURATION ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> Network -> IP Configuration  All  All  NAT Status  ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> Network -> NAT  SU Mode / End Mode B mode Dynamic Start Port  ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> Network -> NAT  SU Mode / End Mode B mode Dynamic End Port  ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> Network -> NAT  SU Mode / End Mode B mode PPPoE Status  ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> Network -> PPPoE Client  SU Mode    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  220
    Parameters Requiring Reboot    Parameter(s)  Web Page(s)  Applicable Device Mode* Ethernet Interface Properties  Admin Status  ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> Network -> Ethernet Wireless Properties Channel Bandwidth  BASIC CONFIGURATION ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> Wireless -> Properties Channel Offset ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> Wireless -> Properties Applicable only to, •   Tsunami® MP-8160-BSU •   Tsunami® MP-8160-SUA •   Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE •   Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE •   Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-12/50  Frequency Extension  ADVANCED CONFIGURATION -> Wireless -> MIMO Properties  All Upgrade Firmware and Configuration Upgrade Firmware  MANAGEMENT -> File Management -> Upgrade Firmware  All Upgrade  MANAGEMENT -> File Management -> Upgrade Configuration  All Configuration HTTP / HTTPS Admin Password  All Monitor Password  All HTTP  MANAGEMENT -> Services -> HTTP / HTTPS  All HTTP Port  All HTTPS  All Telnet / SSH Admin Password Monitor Password Telnet Telnet Port Telnet Sessions SSH SSH Port SSH Sessions       MANAGEMENT -> Services -> Telnet / SSH All All  All  All  All  All  All  All  SNMP (If SNMP v1-v2c is enabled)     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  221
    Parameters Requiring Reboot    Parameter(s)  Web Page(s)  Applicable Device Mode* SNMP  All Version  All Read Password  All MANAGEMENT -> Services -> SNMP  Read / Write  All Password SNMP Trap Host  All Table SNMP (If SNMP v3 is enabled) SNMP Version Security Level Priv Protocol Priv Password Auth Protocol Auth Password SNMP Trap Host  Table       MANAGEMENT -> Services -> SNMP All All  All  All  All  All  All  All  Management Access Control Access Table Status Management Access Control Table All MANAGEMENT -> Access Control  All  Reset to Factory  MANAGEMENT -> Reset to Factory  All Convert QB to MP  MANAGEMENT -> Convert QB to MP  Applicable only to •  Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA  •  Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR   * BSU: Refers to a Base Station  SU Mode: Refers to both SU and CPE  End Point A Mode: Refers to a device in End Point A mode  End Point B Mode: Refers to a device in End Point B mode                 Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  222
C      Frequency Domains and Channels  Introduction  The Tsunami® Point-to-point and Point-to-multipoint products are available in two SKUs: United States (US) and rest of the World (WD) markets. Depending on the SKU, the device is hard programmed at factory to that Regulatory domain. Regulatory domain controls the list of frequency domains that are available in that SKU. Further each frequency domain will define the country specific regulatory rules and frequency bands. This is a configurable option. The following table lists all the Tsunami® products with their respective Frequency domains and SKUs supported.   Product  Supported Frequency Band  Supported SKUs Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU  2.3 - 2.5 GHz and 4.9 - 6.0 GHz  US, World Tsunami® MP-8100-SUA  2.3 - 2.5 GHz and 4.9 - 6.0 GHz  US, World Tsunami® MP-8150-SUR  4.9 - 6.0 GHz  US, World Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE  5.3 - 6.1 GHz  US, World Tsunami® MP-8160-BSU  5.9 - 6.4 GHz  World Tsunami® MP-8160-SUA  5.9 - 6.4 GHz  World Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE  5.9 - 6.4 GHz  World Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA  2.3 - 2.5 GHz and 4.9 - 6.0 GHz  US, World Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR  4.9 - 6.0 GHz  US, World Tsunami® QB-8150-LNK-12/50  5.3 - 6.1 GHz  US, World  The frequency domains can be easily configured using the Web Interface as it is a drop down list with all the available domains. When the device is configured with CLI or SNMP, care has to be taken to set the domains using a predefined ENUM value. Below is the list of all available frequency domains in each SKU with their corresponding ENUM value in the braces:  Frequency Domain  ENUM Value US SKU United States 5.8 GHz  2 United States 2.4 GHz  3 United States2 (5.3 to 5.8 GHz)  22 World SKU United States 5 GHz  1 World 5 GHz  4 World 4.9 GHz  5 World 2.4 GHz  6     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  223
    Frequency Domains and Channels    World 2.3 GHz  7 World 2.5 GHz  8 Canada 5 GHz  9 Europe 5.8 GHz  10 Europe 5.4 GHz  11 Europe 2.4 GHz  12 Russia 5 GHz  13 Taiwan 5 GHz  14 United States 5 GHz  15 Canada 5.8 GHz  16 World 6.4 GHz  17 UK 5.8 GHz  20 World 5.9 GHz  21 India 5.8 GHz  23 Brazil 5.4 GHz  24 Brazil 5.8 GHz  25 Australia 5.4 GHz  26 Australia 5.8 GHz  27  Example: To set WORLD 5 GHz as Frequency Domain using CLI    T8000-C1:65:7E(config)# system-configure  T8000-C1:65:7E(config-sysconfig)# network-mode bridge Changes in Network mode requires Reboot.  T8000-C1:65:7E(config-sysconfig)# frequency-domain ? Possible completions:  <Use 'show supported-frequency-domains' to get supported frequency domains  list>  Frequency Domain Configuration  T8000-C1:65:7E(config-sysconfig)# frequency-domain 4 Changes in Frequency Domain requires Reboot.  T8000-C1:65:7E(config-sysconfig)#exit  T8000-C1:65:7E(config)#exit                     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  224
    Frequency Domains and Channels   2.4 GHz Channels  2.4 GHz frequency band is supported by the following devices:  • Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU • Tsunami® MP-8100-SUA • Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA  Frequency Frequency Domain Band (Start Frequency ~ End Frequency in MHz)  Allowed Channels (Center Frequency in GHz) 5 MHz  10 MHz  20 MHz 40 PLUS 40 MINUS MHz MHz  US SKU  United States  2412 ~ 2462  1 (2412),  1 (2412),  1 (2412),  1 (2412),  5 (2432), 2.4 GHz  2 (2417),  2 (2417),  2 (2417),  2 (2417),  6 (2437), 3 (2422)...  3 (2422)...  3 (2422)...  3 (2422)...  7 (2442)... 11 (2462).  11 (2462).  11 (2462).  7 (2442).  11 (2462). World SKU World 2.3 GHz  2277 ~ 2397  100 (2277),  100 (2277),  101 (2282),  101 (2282),  105 (2302), 101 (2282),  101 (2282),  102 (2287),  102 (2287),  106(2307), 102 (2287),  102 (2287),  103(2292)...  103 (2292)...  107(2312)... 103 (2292)...  103 (2292)...  122 (2387).  118 (2367).  122 (2387). 124 (2397).  123 (2392). World 2.4 GHz  2412 ~ 2472  1 (2412),  1 (2412),  1 (2412),  1 (2412),  5 (2432), 2 (2417),  2 (2417),  2 (2417),  2 (2417),  6 (2437), 3 (2422)...  3 (2422)...  3 (2422)...  3 (2422)...  7 (2442)... 13 (2472).  13 (2472).  13 (2472).  9 (2452).  13 (2472). World 2.5 GHz  2477 ~ 2507  200(2477),  200(2477),  201(2482),  201(2482)  205(2502) 201(2482), 201(2482), 202 (2487), 202 (2487),  202 (2487),  203(2492), 203(2492), 203(2492), 204(2497), 204(2497), 204(2497), 205 (2502). 205 (2502),  205 (2502), 206(2507). 206 (2507). Europe 2.4  2412 ~ 2472  1 (2412),  1 (2412),  1 (2412),  1 (2412),  5 (2432), GHz  2 (2417),  2 (2417),  2 (2417),  2 (2417),  6 (2437), 3 (2422)...  3 (2422)...  3 (2422)...  3 (2422)...  7 (2442)... 13 (2472).  13 (2472).  13 (2472).  9 (2452).  13 (2472).             Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  225
    Frequency Domains and Channels   5 GHz Channels  5 GHz frequency band is supported by the following devices:  • Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU • Tsunami® MP-8100-SUA • Tsunami® MP-8150-SUR • Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA • Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR • Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE • Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-12/50  Frequency Frequency Band Domain (Start Frequency ~ End Frequency in MHz)  Allowed Channels (Center Frequency in GHz) 5 MHz  10 MHz  20 MHz 40 PLUS 40 MINUS MHz MHz  US SKU United  5740 ~ 5830 (Non-DFS)  148(5740),  149(5745),  149(5745),  149(5745),  153(5765), States 5.8  149(5745)... 150(5750)... 150(5750)... 150(5750)... 154(5770)... GHz  165(5825), 164(5820), 164(5820), 160(5800), 164(5820), 166(5830). 165(5825). 165(5825). 161(5805). 165(5825). United  5255 ~ 5325 (DFS)  51(5255),  52(5260),  52(5260),  52(5260),  56(5280), States2 (5.3,  5740 ~ 5830 (Non-DFS)  52(5260)...  53(5265)... 53(5265)... 53(5265)... 57(5285)... 5.8 GHz)  64(5320), 63(5315), 63(5315), 59(5295), 63(5315), 65(5325). 64(5320). 64(5320). 60(5300). 64(5320). 148(5740), 149(5745), 149(5745), 149(5745), 153(5765), 149(5745)... 150(5750)... 150(5750)... 150(5750)... 154(5770)... 165(5825), 164(5820), 164(5820), 160(5800), 164(5820), 166(5830). 165(5825). 165(5825). 161(5805). 165(5825). World SKU United  5255 ~ 5325 (DFS)  51(5255),  52(5260),  52(5260),  52(5260),  56(5280), States 5  5495 ~ 5585 (DFS)  52(5260)...  53(5265)... 53(5265)... 53(5265)... 57(5285)... GHz  5655 ~ 5830 (Non-DFS)  64(5320),  63(5315),  63(5315),  59(5295),  63(5315), 65(5325). 64(5320). 64(5320). 60(5300). 64(5320). 99(5495), 100(5500), 100(5500), 100(5500), 104(5520), 100(5500)... 101(5505)... 101(5505)... 101(5505)... 105(5525)... 116(5580), 115(5575), 115(5575), 111(5555), 115(5575), 117(5585). 116(5580). 116(5580). 112(5560). 116(5580). 131(5655), 132(5660), 132(5660), 132(5660), 136(5680), 132(5660)... 133(5665)... 133(5665)... 133(5665)... 137(5685)... 140(5700), 139(5695), 139(5695), 135(5675), 139(5695), 141(5705). 140(5700). 140(5700). 136(5680). 140(5700). 148(5740), 149(5745), 149(5745), 149(5745), 153(5765), 149(5745)... 150(5750)... 150(5750)... 150(5750)... 154()5770)... 165(5825), 164(5820), 164(5820), 160(5800), 164(5820), 166(5830). 165(5825). 165(5825). 161(5805). 165(5825).     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  226
    Frequency Domains and Channels   Frequency Frequency Band Domain (Start Frequency ~ End Frequency in MHz)   Allowed Channels (Center Frequency in GHz) 5 MHz  10 MHz  20 MHz 40 PLUS 40 MINUS MHz MHz  World 5  5155 ~ 6075 (Non-DFS)  31(5155),  31(5155),  32(5160),  32(5160),  36(5180), GHz  32(5160)... 32(5160)... 33(5165)... 33(5165)... 37(5185)... 214(6070), 214(6070), 213(6065), 209(6045), 213(6065), 215(6075). 215(6075). 214(6070). 210(6050). 214(6070). WORLD 4.9  4905 ~ 4995 (Non-DFS)  181(4905),  181(4905),  182(4910),  182(4910),  186(4930), GHz*  182(4910)… 182(4910)… 183(4915)… 183(4915)… 187(4935), 188(4940). 188(4940). 188(4940). 188(4940). 188(4940), 10(4945), 10(4945), 10(4945), 10(4945), 10(4945), 20(4950)… 20(4950)… 20(4950)… 20(4950)… 20(4950)… 110(4995) 110(4995) 100(4990) 60(4970)  100(4990) WORLD 5.9  5880 ~ 5920 (Non-DFS)  176(5880),  176(5880),  177(5885),  177(5885),  181(5905), GHz*  177(5885)... 177(5885)... 178(5890)... 178(5890),  182(5910), 183(5915), 183(5915), 182(5910), 179(5895). 183(5915). 184(5920). 184(5920). 183(5915). CANADA 5  5255 ~ 5325 (DFS)  51(5255),  52(5260),  52(5260),  52(5260),  56(5280), GHz  5495 ~ 5585 (DFS)  52(5260)...  53(5265)... 53(5265)... 53(5265)... 57(5285)... 5655 ~ 5705 (DFS)  64(5320),  63(5315),  63(5315),  59(5295),  63(5315), 65(5325). 64(5320). 64(5320). 60(5300). 64(5320). 99(5495), 100(5500), 100(5500), 100(5500), 104(5520), 100(5500)... 101(5505)... 101(5505)... 101(5505)... 105(5525)... 116(5580) 115(5575), 115(5575), 111(5555), 115(5575), 117(5585). 116(5580). 116(5580). 112(5560). 116(5580). 131(5655), 132(5660), 132(5660), 132(5660), 136(5680), 132(5660)... 133(5665)... 133(5665)... 133(5665)... 137(5685)... 140(5700), 139(5695), 139(5695), 135(5675), 139(5695), 141(5705). 140(5700). 140(5700). 136(5680). 140(5700). EUROPE  5495 ~ 5585 (DFS)  99(5495),  100(5500),  100(5500),  100(5500),  104(5520), 5.4 GHz  5655 ~ 5705 (DFS)  100(5500)...  101(5505)... 101(5505)... 101(5505)... 105(5525)... 116(5580), 115(5575), 115(5575), 111(5555), 115(5575), 117(5585). 116(5580). 116(5580). 112(5560). 116(5580). 131(5655), 132(5660), 132(5660), 132(5660), 136(5680), 132(5660)... 133(5665)... 133(5665)... 133(5665)... 137(5685)... 140(5700), 139(5695), 139(5695), 135(5675), 139(5695), 141(5705). 140(5700). 140(5700). 136(5680). 140(5700). EUROPE  5735 ~ 5870 (DFS)  147(5735),  147(5735),  149(5745),  149(5745),  153(5765), 5.8 GHz  148(5740)...  148(5740)...  150(5750)... 150(5750)… 154(5770)... 173(5865), 173(5865), 172(5860), 168(5840), 172(5860), 174(5870). 174(5870). 173(5865). 169(5845). 173(5865).          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  227
    Frequency Domains and Channels   Frequency Frequency Band Domain (Start Frequency ~ End Frequency in MHz)   Allowed Channels (Center Frequency in GHz) 5 MHz  10 MHz  20 MHz 40 PLUS 40 MINUS MHz MHz  RUSSIA  5155 ~ 6075 (Non-DFS)  31(5155),  31(5155),  32(5160),  32(5160),  36(5180), 5 GHz  32(5160)...  32(5160)...  33(5165)... 33(5165)... 37(5185)... 214(6070), 214(6070), 213(6065), 219(6045), 213(6065), 215(6075). 215(6075). 214(6070). 210(6050). 214(6070). Taiwan 5  5495 ~ 5705 (DFS)  99(5495),  100(5500),  100(5500),  100(5500),  104(5520), GHz  5740 ~ 5810 (Non-DFS)  100(5500)...  101(5505)... 101(5505)... 101(5505)... 105(5525)... 140(5700), 139(5695), 139(5695), 135(5675), 139(5695), 141(5705). 140(5700). 140(5700). 136(5680). 140(5700). 148(5740), 149(5745), 149(5745), 149(5745), 153(5765), 149(5745)... 150(5750)... 150(5750)... 150(5750)... 154(5770)... 161(5805), 160(5800), 160(5800), 156(5780), 160(5800), 162(5810). 161(5805). 161(5805). 157(5785). 161(5805). India 5.8  5830 ~ 5870 (Non-DFS)  166(5830),  166(5830),  167(5835),  167(5835),  171(5855), GHz  167(5835)... 167(5835)... 168(5840)... 168(5840),  172(5860), 173(5865), 173(5865), 172(5860), 169(5845). 173(5865). 174(5870). 174(5870). 173(5865). CANADA  5735 ~ 5855 (Non-DFS)  147(5735),  147(5735),  148(5740),  148(5740),  152(5760), 5.8 GHz  148(5740)...  148(5740)...  149(5745)... 149(5745)... 153(5765)... 170(5850), 170(5850), 169(5845), 165(5825), 169(5845), 171(5855). 171(5855). 170(5850). 166(5830). 170(5850). U.K  5730 ~ 5790 (DFS)  146(5730),  147(5735),  147(5735),  147(5735),  151(5755), 5.8 GHz  5820 ~ 5845 (DFS)  147(5735)...  148(5740)... 148(5740)... 148(5740)... 152(5760)... 157(5785), 156(5780), 156(5780), 152(5760), 156(5780), 158(5790), 157(5785), 157(5785), 153(5765). 157(5785). 164(5820)... 167(5835).  167(5835). 169(5845). Australia  5475 ~ 5595 (DFS)  95(5475),  95(5475),  96(5480),  96(5480),  100(5500), 5.4 GHz  5655 ~ 5720 (DFS)  96(5480)  96(5480)…  97(5485)…  97(5485)…  101(5505)… 97(5485)… 118(5590),  117(5585),  114(5570), 118(5590), 119(5595). 119(5595). 118(5590). 132(5660), 136(5680), 131(5655) 131(5655) 132(5660), 133(5665)… 137(5685)… 132(5660) 132(5660) 133(5665)… 139(5695) 143(5715). 133(5665)… 133(5665)… 143(5715). 144(5720). 144(5720). Australia  5730 ~ 5845 (Non-DFS)  146(5730),  146(5730),  147(5735),  147(5735),  151(5755), 5.8 GHz  147(5735)…  147(5735),  148(5740)…  148(5740)...  152(5760)… 169(5845). 148(5740)… 168(5840). 164(5820). 168(5840). 169(5845).         Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  228
    Frequency Domains and Channels   Frequency Frequency Band Domain (Start Frequency ~ End Frequency in MHz)   Allowed Channels (Center Frequency in GHz) 5 MHz  10 MHz  20 MHz 40 PLUS 40 MINUS MHz MHz  Brazil  5475 ~ 5720 (DFS)  95(5475),  95(5475),  96(5480),  96(5480),  100(5500), 5.4 GHz  96(5480),  96(5480),  97(5485)…  97(5485)…  101(5505)… 97(5485)… 97(5485)… 142(5710),  138(5690)... 142(5710), 144(5720). 144(5720). 143(5715). 139(5695). 143(5715). Brazil 5730-5845 (Non-DFS) 146(5730), 146(5730), 147(5735), 147(5735), 151(5755), 5.8 GHz  147(5735)…  147(5735),  148(5740)…  148(5740)...  152(5760)… 169(5845). 148(5740)… 168(5840). 164(5820). 168(5840). 169(5845).  * Not applicable for MP-8150-CPE and QB-8150-EPR-12/50 products.                                                           Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  229
    Frequency Domains and Channels   6.4 GHz Channels  6.4 GHz frequency band is supported by the following devices:  • Tsunami® MP-8160-BSU • Tsunami® MP-8160-SUA • Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE  Frequency Frequency Domain Band (Start Frequency ~ End Frequency in MHz)  Allowed Channels (Center Frequency) 5 MHz  10 MHz  20 MHz 40 PLUS 40 MINUS MHz MHz  World 6.4 GHz  5905 ~ 6420  181 (5905),  181 (5905),  182 (5910),  182 (5910),  186 (5930) 182 (5910),  182 (5910),  183 (5915),  183 (5915),  187 (5935), 183 (5915)...  183 (5915)...  184 (5920)...  184 (5920)...  188 (5940)... 284 (6420).  284 (6420).  283 (6415).  279 (6395).  283 (6415).   : The center frequency listed in the above tables are based on channel offset set to ‘0’. If channel offset is set to any  value other than ‘0’ then the center frequency will be shifted accordingly. You can set the channel offset ranging from  -2  to  +2  MHz in  the  following  devices:  Tsunami®  MP-8150-CPE;  Tsunami®  QB-8150-EPR-12/50; Tsunami®  MP-8160-BSU; Tsunami® MP-8160-SUA and Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE.   Details for 40MHz Bandwidth  While choosing 40MHz bandwidth, you can select 40 PLUS or 40 MINUS. 40 PLUS means the center frequency calculation is done for 20MHz and add another 20MHz to the top edge of 20MHz. 40 MINUS means the center frequency calculation is done for 20MHz and add another 20MHz to the bottom edge of 20MHz.  For 40 PLUS  • 2.4GHz -> - Channel 1 = 2412 MHz  - Bandwidth starts from 2403 MHz and ends at 2442 MHz  • 5GHz -> - Channel 52 = 5260 MHz  - Bandwidth starts from 5251 MHz and ends at 5290 MHz  For 40 MINUS  • 2.4GHz -> - Channel 5 = 2432 MHz - Bandwidth starts from 2403 MHz and ends at 2442 MHz • 5GHz -> - Channel 56 = 5280 MHz - Bandwidth starts from 5251 MHz and ends at 5290 MHz       Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  230
D      SNR Information   Tabulated below are the SNR values for the following devices: •   Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU •   Tsunami® MP-8100-SUA •   Tsunami® MP-8150-SUR •  Tsunami® QB-8100-EPA •  Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR   2.4 GHz MCS No Index Modulation of Streams 5 MHz Data Min Max Data Rate SNR SNR Rate 10 MHz  20 MHz Min Max Data Min SNR SNR Rate SNR 40 MHz Max Data Min Max SNR Rate SNR SNR  MCS0 BPSK 1/2  Single  1.6 10 86 3.3 10 86 6.5 12 86 13.5 26 80 MCS1 QPSK 1/2  Single  3.3 15 86 6.5 16 86 13 21 86  27  26 80 MCS2 QPSK 3/4  Single  4.9 21 84 9.7 21 84 19.5 21 84 40.5 26 79 MCS3  16 QAM 1/2  Single  6.5  23  82  13  23  82  26  23  82  54  30  77 MCS4  16 QAM 3/4  Single  9.7  26  80  19.5  26  80  39  25  80  81  33  77 MCS5  64 QAM 2/3  Single  13  29  79  26  29  79  52  27  78  108  37  76 MCS6 64 QAM 3/4 Single  14.6 30  79 29.3 31  78 58.5 30  77 121.5 40  75 MCS7  64 QAM 5/6  Single  16.2  32  78  32.5  32  78  65  32  77  135  42  75 MCS8 BPSK 1/2  Dual  3.3 12 86 6.5 14 86 13 14 86  27  16 80 MCS9 QPSK 1/2  Dual  6.5 20 84 13 21 84 26 21 84  54  26 80 MCS10 QPSK 3/4  Dual  9.7  22  82  19.5  23  82  39  22  82  81  28  79 MCS11  16 QAM 1/2  Dual  13  23  80  26  23  80  52  24  80  108  32  77 MCS12  16 QAM 3/4  Dual  19.5  27  80  39  27  80  78  30  78  162  35  77 MCS13  64 QAM 2/3  Dual  26  30  79  52  30  79  104  34  78  216  37  76 MCS14  64 QAM 3/4  Dual  29.3  36  78  58.5  35  77  117  37  77  243  43  75 MCS15  64 QAM 5/6  Dual  32.5  39  78  65  38  77  130  39  76  270  45  75  5 GHz MCS No Index Modulation of Streams 5 MHz Data Min Max Data Rate SNR SNR Rate 10 MHz  20 MHz Min Max Data Min SNR SNR Rate SNR 40 MHz Max Data Min Max SNR Rate SNR SNR  MCS0 BPSK 1/2  Single  1.6 6 86 3.3 7 86 6.5 6 86 13.5 9 80     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  231
    SNR Information    5 GHz MCS No Index Modulation of Streams 5 MHz Data Min Max Data Rate SNR SNR Rate 10 MHz  20 MHz Min Max Data Min SNR SNR Rate SNR 40 MHz Max Data Min Max SNR Rate SNR SNR  MCS1 QPSK 1/2 Single  3.3 8 86 6.5 8 86 13 9 86 27 11 80 MCS2 QPSK 3/4  Single  4.9 10 84  9.7 13 84 19.5 11 84 40.5 15 79 MCS3 16 QAM 1/2 Single  6.5 14 82 13 16 82 26 14 82  54 16 77 MCS4  16 QAM 3/4  Single  9.7  17  80  19.5  20  80  39  18  80  81  20  77 MCS5  64 QAM 2/3  Single  13  22  79  26  24  79  52  22  78  108  24  76 MCS6  64 QAM 3/4  Single  14.6  25  79  29.3  26  78  58.5  25  77  121.5  27  75 MCS7  64 QAM 5/6  Single  16.2  28  78  32.5  29  78  65  28  77  135  30  75 MCS8 BPSK 1/2 Dual  3.3 8 86 6.5 9 86 13 9 86 27 9 80 MCS9 QPSK 1/2 Dual  6.5 12 84 13 12 84 26 12 84  54 13 80 MCS10 QPSK 3/4  Dual  9.7  14  82  19.5  15  82  39  14  82  81  17  79 MCS11  16 QAM 1/2  Dual  13  16  80  26  16  80  52  16  80  108  22  77 MCS12  16 QAM 3/4  Dual  19.5  20  80  39  21  80  78  20  78  162  25  77 MCS13  64 QAM 2/3  Dual  26  25  79  52  26  79  104  26  78  216  27  76 MCS14  64 QAM 3/4  Dual  29.3  29  78  58.5  29  77  117  29  77  243  30  75 MCS15  64 QAM 5/6  Dual  32.5  30  78  65  30  77  130  30  76  270  33  75   Tabulated below are the SNR values for the following device(s) in legacy mode: • Tsunami® MP-8100-BSU  2.4 GHz  5 GHz  Modulation  5 MHz  10 MHz  20 MHz  5 MHz  10 MHz  20 MHz Data Min Max Data Min Max Data Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Rate SNR SNR Rate SNR SNR Rate SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR SNR BPSK 1/2  1.5  10  84  3  10  84  6  13  84  8  84  8  84  7  81 BPSK 3/4  2.25  10  84  4.5  11  84  9  13  84  9  84  9  84  8  81 QPSK 1/2  3  12  84  6  11  84  12  15  84  10  82  10  82  9  81 QPSK 3/4  4.5 14 84  9  13 84 18 15 84 12 82 11 82 12 81 16QAM 1/2  6  17 82 12 17 80 24 22 80 16 82 16 82 15 80 16QAM 3/4  9  20 82 18 23 78 36 25 73 18 82 18 80 18 80 64QAM 2/3  12 27 81 24 29 76 48 28 73 24 80 24 80 24 78 64QAM 3/4 13.5 29 80 27 30 74  54 29 72  27 80 27 80 27 76    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  232
    SNR Information    Tabulated below are the SNR values for the following devices:  • Tsunami® MP-8150-CPE • Tsunami® QB-8150-EPR-12/50  5 GHz MCS No Index Modulation of Streams 5 MHz Data Min Max Data Rate SNR SNR Rate 10 MHz  20 MHz Min Max Data Min SNR SNR Rate SNR 40 MHz Max Data Min Max SNR Rate SNR SNR  MCS0 BPSK 1/2  Single  1.6 8 82 3.3 8 82 6.5 8 82 13.5 8 82 MCS1 QPSK 1/2 Single  3.3 8 82 6.5 9 82 13  9 82 27  9 82 MCS2 QPSK 3/4  Single  4.9 10 82 9.7 11 82 19.5 11 82 40.5 11 80 MCS3 16 QAM 1/2 Single  6.5 13 82 13 15 82 26 17 82  54  16 80 MCS4 16 QAM 3/4 Single  9.7 16 82 19.5 19 82 39 19 82  81  18 80 MCS5 64 QAM 2/3 Single  13 20 81 26 22 81 52 23 81 108 23 79 MCS6  64 QAM 3/4  Single  14.6  22  80  29.3  24  80  58.5  25  80  121.5  24  79 MCS7 64 QAM 5/6 Single  16.2 24 80 32.5 26 80 65 26 80 135 26 79 MCS8 BPSK 1/2 Dual  3.3 9 82 6.5 8 82 13 9 82 27  9 82 MCS9 QPSK 1/2  Dual  6.5 10 82 13 10 82  26  12 82  54  11 80 MCS10 QPSK 3/4  Dual  9.7 12 82 19.5 12 82  39  13 82  81  13 80 MCS11 16 QAM 1/2 Dual  13 16 82 26 16 82 52 18 82 108 15 78 MCS12  16 QAM 3/4  Dual  19.5  19  80  39  20  82  78  19  82  162  20  68 MCS13  64 QAM 2/3  Dual  26  24  80  52  24  80  104  24  80  216  24  60 MCS14  64 QAM 3/4  Dual  29.3  29  80  58.5  30  78  117  27  78  243  29  58 MCS15  64 QAM 5/6  Dual  32.5  33  80  65  33  78  130  32  78  270  32  56   Tabulated below are the SNR values for the following devices: • Tsunami® MP-8160-BSU • Tsunami® MP-8160-SUA • Tsunami® MP-8160-CPE  6.4 GHz MCS No Index Modulation of Streams 5 MHz Data Min Max Data Rate SNR SNR Rate 10 MHz  20 MHz Min Max Data Min SNR SNR Rate SNR 40 MHz Max Data Min Max SNR Rate SNR SNR  MCS0 BPSK 1/2  Single  1.6 6 87 3.3 6 87 6.5 6 87 13.5 7 87 MCS1 QPSK 1/2 Single  3.3 8 87 6.5 8 87 13  7 87 27  8 86     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  233
    SNR Information    6.4 GHz MCS No Index Modulation of Streams 5 MHz Data Min Max Data Rate SNR SNR Rate 10 MHz  20 MHz Min Max Data Min SNR SNR Rate SNR 40 MHz Max Data Min Max SNR Rate SNR SNR  MCS2 QPSK 3/4  Single  4.9 10 86 9.7 10 84 19.5 10 86 40.5 12 82 MCS3 16 QAM 1/2 Single  6.5 13 84 13 14 84 26 13 82  54  13 74 MCS4 16 QAM 3/4 Single  9.7 16 80 19.5 16 78 39 16 76  81  19 70 MCS5 64 QAM 2/3 Single  13 21 74 26 21 70 52 20 70 108 21 62 MCS6  64 QAM 3/4  Single  14.6  22  70  29.3  23  67  58.5  22  67  121.5  24  56 MCS7 64 QAM 5/6 Single  16.2 24 67 32.5 24 65 65  24 65 135 27 55 MCS8 BPSK 1/2  Dual  3.3 8 87 6.5 8 87 13  7 86 27 10 86 MCS9 QPSK 1/2  Dual  6.5 10 87 13 10 87 26 11 84  54  12 82 MCS10 QPSK 3/4  Dual  9.7 15 84 19.5 13 84  39 13 82  81  15 75 MCS11  16 QAM 1/2  Dual  13  16  80  26  17  80  52  17  78  108  18  74 MCS12 16 QAM 3/4 Dual  19.5 20 74 39 23 74 78 20 71 162 22 56 MCS13 64 QAM 2/3 Dual  26 25 70 52 24 66 104 24 65 216 25 55 MCS14 64 QAM 3/4 Dual  29.3 27 66 58.5 27 62 117 27 62 243 27 53 MCS15 64 QAM 5/6 Dual  32.5 28 64 65 29 62 130 29 62 270 30 52                                          Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  234
E      Bootloader CLI and ScanTool  Bootloader CLI  The Bootloader CLI is a minimal subset of the normal CLI used to perform initial configuration of the device. The Bootloader CLI is available when the device embedded software is not running.  This interface is only accessible through the serial interface, if:  •  The device does not contain a software image •  An existing image is corrupted •  An automatic (default) download of image over TFTP has failed The Bootloader CLI provides the ability to configure the initial setup parameters; and depending on this configuration, a software file is downloaded to the device during startup. The Bootloader CLI supports the following commands: •  factory_reset: Restore the factory settings •  help: Print Online Help •  reboot: Reboot the device •  set: Set the parameters •  show: Show the parameters The Bootloader CLI supports the following parameters (for viewing and modifying): •  ipaddr: IP Address •  systemname: System Name •  gatewayip: Gateway IP Address •  serverip: Server IP Address •  ipaddrtype: IP Address Type •  netmask: Net Mask •  filename: Image file name (including the file extension) If the Bootloader fails to load the firmware from flash, it tries to get the firmware from the network. While trying to get firmware from the network, the device should be powered on using Ethernet 1 interface of the device. The default configuration of the Bootloader parameters are as follows:  Parameter Value ipaddr 169.254.128.132 netmask 255.255.255.0 gatewayip 169.254.128.132 systemname systemname serverip 169.254.128.133 filename imagename ipaddrtype dynamic    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  235
    Bootloader CLI and ScanTool    To Load the Firmware from the Network  • Use the show command to view the parameters and their values, and use the set command to set the parameter value.  To Get the IP Parameters Dynamically for Loading the Firmware  1.  Set the ipaddrtype to dynamic  2.  Run the BOOTP and TFTP Servers followed by reboot of the device  When the device reboots, the device gets the IP Address and Boot filename from the BOOTP server. You need not change any  of the default Bootloader parameters. After BOOTP succeeds, the device initiates a TFTP request with the filename it gets  from BOOTP.   To Load the Firmware by Using Static IP Parameters  1.  Use the set command to set the IP parameters like ‘ipaddr’, ‘serverip’, ‘filename’ and also set the parameter    ‘ipaddrtype’ to static.  2.  Run the TFTP Server followed by reboot of the device  When the device reboots, the TFTP request is initiated with the value taken from the parameter “filename”. This request is sent to the IP address set as "serverip”. In this case, the TFTP Server should be reachable to the device.   ScanTool  If you want to access the device with Scantool, then the host running the ScanTool should also be in the same network as the device. The ScanTool broadcast requests are discarded by the routers if the device and the host running the ScanTool are in different network. This means that the ScanTool cannot discover the device.  A device in Bootloader can be recognized by looking at the system description. If the system description does not contain any build number in braces, conclude that the device is in Bootloader mode.  For example:  Tsunami MP-8100-BSU-WD  - Description of the device v2.4.0 - Firmware Version SN-11Pl15010031  - Serial Number BL-v1.3.1  - Bootloader version                 Figure E-1 Scan Tool View of a Device in Bootloader Mode (An Example)     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  236
F      Lightning Protection    Lightning protection is used to maximize the reliability of the communications equipment by safely re-directing current from a lightning strike or a power surge traveling along the Cat 5/Cat5e/Cat 6 Ethernet cabling to the ground using the shortest path possible. Designing a proper grounding system prior to installing any communications equipment is critical to minimize the possibility of equipment damage, void warranties, and cause serious injury.  The surge arrestor (sometimes referred to as a lightning protector) can protect your sensitive electronic equipment from high-voltage surges caused by discharges and transients at the PoE.  Proxim Wireless offers superior lightning and surge protection for Tsunami® series products. Contact your reseller or distributor for more information.                                                               Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  237
G      Abbreviations          A   ACL  Access Control List ACS  Automatic Channel Selection AES Advanced Encryption Standard ALG  Application Level Gateway ARP  Address Resolution Protocol ATPC Adaptive Transmit Power Control B  BSU Base Station Unit C  CCP  Compression Control Protocol CHAP  Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CLI Command Line Interface CIR Committed Information Rate CPE Customer Premises Equipment CRC  Cyclic Redundancy Check D DDRS  Dynamic Data Rate Selection DES Data Encryption Standard DFS  Dynamic Frequency Selection DHCP  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DNS Domain Name System DSL  Digital Subscriber Line E EIRP  Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power ETSI  European Telecommunications Standards Institute F     Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  238
    Abbreviations    FCC  Federal Communications Commission FCS  Frame Check Sequence G Gbps  Gigabit Per Second GPL General Public License GRE  Generic Routing Encapsulation H HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol HTTPS  HyperText Transfer Protocol Secure I  IANA  Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) IC Industry Canada ICMP  Internet Control Message Protocol IGMP  Internet Group Management Protocol ISP  Internet Service Provider ITS  Intelligent Transportation System L  LACP  Link Aggregation Control Protocol LAN Local Area Network LCP Link Configuration Protocol LED  Light Emitting Diode LGPL  Lesser General Public License M MAN Metropolitan Area Networks Mbps Megabits Per Second MD5 Message-Digest algorithm MIB Management Information Base MIMO Multiple-input and multiple-output MIR  Maximum Information Rate MP Multipoint MPPE Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  239
    Abbreviations    MSCHAP v2  Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol MTU  Maximum Transmission Unit N NAPT  Network Address Port Translation NAT Network Address Translation NCP Network Control Protocol NMS  Network Management System NOP  Non Occupancy Period P  PAP Password Authentication Protocol PC Personal Computer PoE Power Over Ethernet PPPoE  Point-to-point Protocol over Ethernet PTMP Point-to-multipoint PTP Point-to-point PVES ProximVision ES Q QB Quick Bridge QoS Quality of Service R RADIUS  Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RAS  Remote Access Services RF Radio Frequency RIP Routing Information Protocol RMA Return Material Authorization RSSI  Received Signal Strength Indicator S  SHA Secure Hash Algorithm SKU  Stock Keeping Unit SNMP  Simple Network Management Protocol SNR Signal-to-noise Ratio    Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  240
    Abbreviations    SNTP  Simple Network Time Protocol SSH Secure Shell SSL Secure Socket Layer STP Spanning Tree Protocol SU Subscriber Unit T  TBC  Text Based Configuration TCP Transmission Control Protocol TFTP  Trivial File Transfer Protocol TKIP  Temporal Key Integrity Protocol TPC Transmit Power Control TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TTL Time to Live U UDP  User Datagram Protocol UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair V VLAN  Virtual Local Area Network W WEP  Wired Equivalent Privacy WORP  Wireless Outdoor Router Protocol                             Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  241
H      Statement of Warranty  Warranty Coverage  Proxim Wireless Corporation warrants that its products are manufactured solely from new parts, conform substantially to  specifications, and will be free of defects in material and workmanship for a Warranty Period of 1 year from the date of  purchase.   Repair or Replacement  In the event where the product fails to perform in accordance with its specification during the Warranty Period, Proxim offers return-to-factory repair or replacement, with a thirty (30) business-day turnaround from the date of receipt of the defective product at a Proxim Wireless Corporation Repair Center. When Proxim Wireless has reasonably determined that a returned product is defective and is still under Warranty, Proxim Wireless shall, at its option, either: (a) repair the defective product; (b) replace the defective product with a refurbished product that is equivalent to the original; or (c) where repair or replacement cannot be accomplished, refund the price paid for the defective product. The Warranty Period for repaired or replacement products shall be ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original Warranty Period, whichever is longer. This constitutes Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy and Proxim Wireless’s sole and exclusive liability under this Warranty.   Limitations of Warranty  The express warranties set forth in this Agreement will not apply to defects in a product caused; (i) through no fault of  Proxim Wireless during shipment to or from Buyer, (ii) by the use of software other than that provided with or installed in the  product, (iii) by the use or operation of the product in an application or environment other than that intended or  recommended by Proxim Wireless, (iv) by modifications, alterations, or repairs made to the product by any party other than  Proxim Wireless or Proxim Wireless’s authorized repair partners, (v) by the product being subjected to unusual physical or  electrical stress, or (vii) by failure of Buyer to comply with any of the return procedures specified in this Statement of  Warranty.  Buyers should return defective products within the first 30 days to the merchant from which the products were purchased. Buyers can contact a Proxim Wireless Customer Service Center either by telephone or via web. Calls for support for products that are near the end of their warranty period should be made not longer than seven (7) days after expiration of warranty. Support and repair of products that are out of warranty will be subject to a repair fee. Contact information is shown below. Additional support information can be found at Proxim Wireless’s web site at http://support.proxim.com.  USA and Canada Customers  Call Technical Support: Phone: 408-383-7700    Toll Free: 866-674-6626  Hours: 6:00 AM to 6:00 P.M. Monday - Friday, Pacific Time  APAC Customers  Call Technical Support: Phone: +91 40 23115490  Hours: 9:00 AM to 6:00 P.M. Monday - Friday, IST (UTC/GMT +5:30 hrs)  International Customers  Call Technical Support: Phone: 408-383-7700  Hours: 6:00 AM to 6:00 P.M. Monday - Friday, Pacific Time      Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  242
    Statement of Warranty   Hours of Operation  When contacting the Customer Service for support, Buyer should be prepared to provide the product description and serial number and a description of the problem. The serial number should be on the product.  In the event the Customer Service Center determines that the problem can be corrected with a software update, Buyer might be instructed to download the update from Proxim Wireless’s web site or, if that’s not possible, the update will be sent to Buyer. In the event the Customer Service Center instructs Buyer to return the product to Proxim Wireless for repair or replacement, the Customer Service Center will provide Buyer a Return Material Authorization (“RMA”) number and shipping instructions. Buyer must return the defective product to Proxim Wireless, properly packaged to prevent damage, shipping prepaid, with the RMA number prominently displayed on the outside of the container.  Calls to the Customer Service Center for reasons other than product failure will not be accepted unless Buyer has purchased a Proxim Wireless Service Contract or the call is made within the first thirty (30) days of the product’s invoice date. Calls that are outside of the 30-day free support time will be charged a fee of $250.00 (US Dollars) per Support Call.  If Proxim Wireless reasonably determines that a returned product is not defective or is not covered by the terms of this Warranty, Buyer shall be charged a service charge and return shipping charges.   Other Information  Search Knowledgebase  Proxim Wireless stores all resolved problems in a solution database at the following URL: http://support.proxim.com.  Ask a Question or Open an Issue  Submit  a  question  or  open  an  issue  to  Proxim  Wireless  technical  support  staff  at  the  following  URL: http://support.proxim.com/cgi-bin/proxim.cfg/php/enduser/ask.php.                                            Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  243
I      Technical Services and Support  Obtaining Technical Service and Support  If you are having trouble using the Proxim product, please read this manual and the additional documentation provided with your product. If you require additional support to resolve your issue, please be ready to provide the following information before you contact Proxim’s Technical Services team:  • Product information - Part number and serial number of the suspected faulty device  • Trouble/error information - Trouble/symptom being experienced  - Activities completed to confirm fault  - Network information (what kind of network are you using?)  - Circumstances that preceded or led up to the error  - Message or alarms viewed  - Steps taken to reproduce the problem  •   ServPak information (if a Servpak customer):  - ServPak account number  • Registration information - If the product is not registered, date and location where you purchased the product    : Technical Support is free for the first 90 days from the date of purchase.   Support Options  Proxim eService Web Site Support  The Proxim eService Web site is available 7x24x365 at http://support.proxim.com. On the Proxim eService Web Site, you can access the following services:  •   New Product Registration: Register your product to gain access to technical updates, software downloads, and free    technical support for the first 90 days from receipt of hardware purchase.  •  Open a Ticket or RMA: Open a ticket or RMA •  Search Knowledgebase: Locate white papers, software upgrades, and technical information. •  ServPak Support: Learn more about Proxim’s ServPak global support service options. •  Your Stuff: Track status of your tickets or RMAs and receive product update notifications. •  Provide Feedback: Submit suggestions or other types of feedback. •  Customer Survey: Submit an online Customer Survey response.             Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  244
    Technical Services and Support   Telephone Support  Contact technical support via telephone as follows:  USA & Canada Customers  Call Technical Support: Phone: 408-383-7700    Toll Free: 866-674-6626  Hours: 6:00 AM to 6:00 P.M. Monday - Friday, Pacific Time  APAC Customers  Call Technical Support: Phone: +91 40 23115490  Hours: 9:00 AM to 6:00 P.M. Monday - Friday, IST (UTC/GMT +5:30 hrs)  International Customers  Call Technical Support: Phone: 408-383-7700  Hours: 6:00 AM to 6:00 P.M. Monday - Friday, Pacific Time  ServPak Support  To provide even greater investment protection, Proxim Wireless offers a cost-effective support program called ServPak. ServPak is a program of enhanced service support options that can be purchased as a bundle or individually, tailored to meet your specific needs. Whether your requirement is round the clock technical support or advance replacement service, we are confident that the level of support provided in every service in our portfolio will exceed your expectations.  •   Advanced Replacement of Hardware: Can you afford to be down in the event of a hardware failure? Our  guaranteed turnaround time for return to factory repair is 30 days or less. Those customers who purchase this service are entitled to advance replacement of refurbished or new hardware guaranteed to be shipped out by the Next  Business Day. Hardware is shipped Monday - Friday, 8:00 AM - 2:00 PM (PST).  •   Extended Warranty: Extend the life of your networking investment by adding 1, 2, or 3 years to your products  standard warranty. This service coverage provides unlimited repair of your Proxim hardware for the life of the service  contract. The cost of an extended warranty is far less than the cost of a repair providing a sensible return on your  investment.  •   7x24x365 Technical Support: This service provides unlimited, direct access to Proxim’s world-class Tier 3 technical    support engineers 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year including Holidays. Customers who purchase this    service can rest assured that their call for technical assistance will be answered and a case opened immediately to    document the problem, troubleshoot, identify the solution and resolve the incident in a timely manner or refer to an    escalation manager for closure.  •   8x5 Technical Support: This service provides unlimited, direct access to Proxim’s world-class technical support 8  hours a day, 5 days a week from 8:00 AM - 5:00 PM (PST(US)). Technical Support is available at no charge for the first 90 days from the purchase date. Beyond this period, a ServPak support agreement will be required for technical  support. Self-help will be made available by accessing Proxim’s extensive eService knowledgebase.  •   Software Maintenance: It's important to maintain and enhance security and performance of wireless equipment    and Proxim makes this easy by providing a Software Maintenance program that enables customers to access new    features and functionality, rich software upgrades and updates. Customers will also have full access to Proxim's vast    knowledgebase of technical bulletins, white papers and troubleshooting documents.  •  Priority Queuing Phone Support: This service provides customers with a one hour response time for technical phone support. There is no waiting in line for those urgent calls for technical support.           Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  245
    Technical Services and Support      24x7Enhanced 8x5 Standard ServPak Service  (Bundled Serv.) (Bundled Serv.)      Extended Warranty      Advance Hardware Replacement      24x7 Software  Technical Maintenance  Support  Product Coverage  Renewable Duration  Contracts  Renewable Renewable Contracts Contracts   Renewable Contracts  Renewable No  Contracts   Software Coverage  Renewable Renewable Duration  Contracts Contracts   No No   Renewable  No Contracts    Proxim TAC Support  Yes Yes No No  No Yes   Software Updates & Upgrades    Yes Yes No No  Yes No   Registered Access to Proxim.com    Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes   Registered Access to Knowledge Tool    Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes   Advance Replacement    Yes No No Yes    No No    Depot Repair  No Yes Yes No  No No  To purchase ServPak support services, please contact your authorized Proxim distributor. To receive more information or for questions on any of the available ServPak support options, call Proxim Support at 408-383-7700 or send an email to servpak@proxim.com.                                  Tsunami® 8100 Series - Software Management Guide  246
FCC Statement Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement   This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures: ●  Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ●  Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ●  Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ●  Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.   FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party   responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.   This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.   This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  FCC NOTICE: To comply with FCC part 15 rules in the United States, the system must be professionally installed to ensure compliance with the Part 15 certification. It is the responsibility of the operator and professional installer to ensure that only certified systems are deployed in the United States. The use of the system in any other combination (such as co-located antennas transmitting the same information) is expressly forbidden.   IMPORTANT NOTE: FCC Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 50cm between the radiator & your body.

Navigation menu